Adtran MX3112 Manual

MX 3RM
M
NE T
ETHE RNET
MX3112 System Manual

Document Number: 61189901L1-1A May 2006
PRELIMINARY
Trademarks
Front Matter
Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders.
To the Holder of the Manual

The contents of this publication are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication.
901 Explorer Boulevard P.O. Box 140000 Huntsville, AL 35814-4000 (256) 963-8000 2006 ADTRAN, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
ii
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Revision History
Revision A Date May 2006 Description of Changes This version of the manual reflects application software version B01.
Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used in this document: This font indicates a cross-reference link. This font indicates screen menus, fields, and parameters. THIS FONT indicates keyboard keys (ENTER, ESC, ALT). Keys that are to be pressed simultaneously are shown with a plus sign (ALT+X indicates that the ALT key and X key should be pressed at the same time). This font indicates references to other documentation and is also used for emphasis. This font indicates on-screen messages and prompts. This font indicates text to be typed exactly as shown. This font indicates silk-screen labels or other system label items. This font is used for strong emphasis. NOTE Notes inform the user of additional, but essential, information or features.
CAUTION Cautions inform the user of potential damage, malfunction, or disruption to equipment, software, or environment.
WARNING Warnings inform the user of potential bodily pain, injury, or death.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
iii
Training
ADTRAN offers training courses on our products. These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRANs product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our facilities or at customer sites. For inquiries concerning training, contact ADTRAN: Training Phone: Training Fax: Training Email: 800-615-1176, ext. 7500 256-963-6700 training@adtran.com
iv
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Contents
Section 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Data Path Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 DS3 Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Data Path Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 The Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Application Mode: COT vs. RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Data Path Provisioning: DS1-to-Group Assignments and Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Step 1: Assign DS1s to Bonding Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Step 2: Provision Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 ACO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Section 2 Engineering Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Dimensions of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 System Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configurations for Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configurations for DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5
Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 DSX-1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Section 3 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Bookend MX3112s - Copper Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Bookend MX3112s - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
OPTI-6100 and MX3112s (Copper Mode and DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Section 4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Required Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Installing the MX3 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rackmount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Chassis Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-6
Installing Cards and Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Installing the Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Installing the MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Installing the MX3ETH4 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Section 5 Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Provisioning Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Data Path Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of Packet Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-8
Section 6 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 System Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Remote Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6-7 6-8 6-9
Logging on to the MX3112 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Menu Trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 MX3112 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
vi
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Contents
Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Application Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 DS3 Interface Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Equipment Identification Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 DS1 Port Interfaces Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 DS1 Port Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 DS1 Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu (Copper Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 DS1 Timing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 DS1 Timing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Link Identifiers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Bonding Groups Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Bonding Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 Packet Flows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Sort By Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Quick-Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Ethernet Client Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Traffic Classes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 Equipment Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 General Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Network Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101 Rear Ethernet Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103 Network Service Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106 Trap Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108 Auto Save Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110 Security Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111 Users Currently Logged On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112 Edit Accounts Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113 Edit User Account Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115 Access Tech Support Account Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116 Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122 Controller Equipment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124 DS3 Status Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126 Environmental Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130 Ethernet Client Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132 DS1 Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133 DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138 DS1 Port Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140 Bonding DS1s Menu (Copper Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142 Bonding DS1s Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143 DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145 DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146 DS1 in DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147 Test Alarm Relays Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
vii
Performance Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS3 Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Thresholds Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 # Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far End Quarter Hourly Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far End Thresholds Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bonding Group Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bonding Group # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet Port # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Performance Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold and Alarm Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controller Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-Definable Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TFTP Update Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-151 6-153 6-156 6-157 6-158 6-159 6-161 6-162 6-163 6-164 6-165 6-166 6-167 6-168 6-169 6-170 6-171 6-173 6-175 6-178 6-179 6-180 6-181 6-182 6-183 6-184 6-185 6-186 6-187 6-188 6-189 6-190 6-191 6-192 6-193 6-195 6-196 6-197 6-198 6-199 6-200 6-202 6-204 6-205 6-206 6-207 6-208 6-209 6-210 6-211 6-212 6-213
viii
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Contents
Section 7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 MX3 Fan Module Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Firmware Upgrade Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Upgrading a Redundant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Controller-to-Controller Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Appendix A Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Warranty and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADTRAN Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADTRAN Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADTRAN Repair/CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repair and Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1 A-1
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
ix
Figures
Figure 1-1. Figure 1-2. Figure 1-3. Figure 1-4. Figure 1-5. Figure 1-6. Figure 1-7. Figure 1-8. Figure 1-9. Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2. Figure 3-3. Figure 3-4. Figure 3-5. Figure 3-6. Figure 4-1. Figure 4-2. Figure 4-3. Figure 4-4. Figure 4-5. Figure 4-6. Figure 4-7. Figure 4-8. Figure 5-1. Figure 5-2. Figure 5-3. Figure 5-4. Figure 6-1. Figure 6-2. Figure 6-3. Figure 6-4. Figure 6-5. Figure 6-6. Figure 6-7. Figure 6-8. Figure 6-9. Figure 6-10. Figure 6-11. Figure 6-12. Figure 6-13. Figure 6-14. Figure 6-15. Figure 6-16. Figure 6-17. Figure 6-18. Figure 6-19. Figure 6-20. Figure 6-21. Figure 6-22. Figure 6-23. Figure 6-24. MX3112 System Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Copper Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Bonding Group Assignment Example (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Bonding Group Assignment Example (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Flow Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 MX3112 Controller Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Physical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Logical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 19-inch Rack Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 23-inch Rack Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Fuse and Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 MX3 Chassis Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 MX3 Fan Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 MX3112 Controller Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 MX3ETH4 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Quick Setup Menu for Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Packet Flows Menu for Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Quick Setup Menu for Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Packet Flows Menu for Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Craft Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Quick Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Management Mode Selection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Management VLAN ID Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Management Port/Group Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through a GEFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through Two GEFMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 VLAN-Based Management of Local and Remote MX3112s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 MX3112 Main Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 MX3112 Main Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36 Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Figures
Figure 6-25. Figure 6-26. Figure 6-27. Figure 6-28. Figure 6-29. Figure 6-30. Figure 6-31. Figure 6-32. Figure 6-33. Figure 6-34. Figure 6-35. Figure 6-36. Figure 6-37. Figure 6-38. Figure 6-39. Figure 6-40. Figure 6-41. Figure 6-42. Figure 6-43. Figure 6-44. Figure 6-45. Figure 6-46. Figure 6-47. Figure 6-48. Figure 6-49. Figure 6-50. Figure 6-51. Figure 6-52. Figure 6-53. Figure 6-54. Figure 6-55. Figure 6-56. Figure 6-57. Figure 6-58. Figure 6-59. Figure 6-60. Figure 6-61. Figure 6-62. Figure 6-63. Figure 6-64. Figure 6-65. Figure 6-66. Figure 6-67. Figure 6-68. Figure 6-69. Figure 6-70. Figure 6-71. Figure 6-72. Figure 6-73. Figure 6-74. Figure 6-75. Figure 6-76. Figure 6-77. Figure 6-78. Figure 6-79.
DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 MX3112 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Application Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 DS3 Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Equipment Identification Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 DS1 Bonding Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 DS1 Bonding Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66 DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Local or Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 DS1 Timing Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Link Identifiers Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Link Identifiers Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Bonding Groups Menu (RT Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Bonding Groups Menu (COT Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Bonding Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 Packet Flows Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Sort By Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Quick-Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Ethernet Client Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to Explicit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94 Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to P-Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 Equipment Protection Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 General Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97 Network Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Management Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101 Rear Ethernet Interface Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103 Network Service Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 SNMP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106 Trap Host Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108 Auto Save Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110 Security Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111 Users Currently Logged On Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112 Edit Accounts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113 Edit User Account Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115 Access Tech Support Account Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116 Quick Setup Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
xi
Figure 6-80. Figure 6-81. Figure 6-82. Figure 6-83. Figure 6-84. Figure 6-85. Figure 6-86. Figure 6-87. Figure 6-88. Figure 6-89. Figure 6-90. Figure 6-91. Figure 6-92. Figure 6-93. Figure 6-94. Figure 6-95. Figure 6-96. Figure 6-97. Figure 6-98. Figure 6-99. Figure 6-100. Figure 6-101. Figure 6-102. Figure 6-103. Figure 6-104. Figure 6-105. Figure 6-106. Figure 6-107. Figure 6-108. Figure 6-109. Figure 6-110. Figure 6-111. Figure 6-112. Figure 6-113. Figure 6-114. Figure 6-115. Figure 6-116. Figure 6-117. Figure 6-118. Figure 6-119. Figure 6-120. Figure 6-121. Figure 6-122. Figure 6-123. Figure 6-124. Figure 6-125. Figure 6-126. Figure 6-127. Figure 6-128. Figure 6-129. Figure 6-130. Figure 6-131. Figure 6-132. Figure 6-133. Figure 6-134.
Quick Setup Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118 Status Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122 Status Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122 Controller Equipment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124 DS3 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126 Environmental Alarms Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130 Ethernet Client Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132 DS1 Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133 DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135 DS1 Bonding Groups Status Screen (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-135 Test Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138 Test Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-138 DS1 Port Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140 Bonding DS1s Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142 Bonding DS1s Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143 DS3 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145 DS1s in DS3 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146 DS1 in DS3 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147 Test Alarm Relays Menu with Inactive Alarm Relay Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149 Test Alarm Relays Menu with Active Alarm Relay Test Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-149 Performance Monitoring Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151 Performance Monitoring Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-151 DS3 Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153 Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156 Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-157 Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158 Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-159 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-160 Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-162 Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-164 DS1 Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165 DS1 # Port Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166 Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167 Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-168 Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170 DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171 DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-171 DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173 DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175 Near End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-178 Near End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-179 Far End Daily Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-180 Far End Quarter Hourly Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-181 Near End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183 Far End Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185 Bonding Group Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186
xii
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Figures
Figure 6-135. Figure 6-136. Figure 6-137. Figure 6-138. Figure 6-139. Figure 6-140. Figure 6-141. Figure 6-142. Figure 6-143. Figure 6-144. Figure 6-145. Figure 6-146. Figure 6-147. Figure 6-148. Figure 6-149. Figure 6-150. Figure 6-151. Figure 6-152. Figure 6-153. Figure 6-154. Figure 6-155. Figure 6-156. Figure 6-157. Figure 6-158. Figure 6-159. Figure 6-160. Figure 7-1. Figure 7-2. Figure 7-3.
Bonding Group # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187 Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188 Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-189 Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-191 Ethernet Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192 Ethernet Port # Stats Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193 Daily Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195 Detailed Daily Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-195 Quarter Hourly Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196 24-Hour History Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-196 Thresholds Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197 Threshold and Alarm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198 System Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199 Master Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200 Controller Alarms Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202 User-Definable Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204 Environmental Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205 Auxiliary Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206 Power Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207 Remote Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208 Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209 Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210 TFTP Update Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211 TFTP Update Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212 Firmware Upgrade Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Firmware Upgrade Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
xiii
Tables
Table 1-1. Table 1-2. Table 1-3. Table 1-4. Table 1-5. Table 1-6. Table 2-1. Table 2-2. Table 2-3. Table 2-4. Table 2-5. Table 2-6. Table 2-7. Table 2-8. Table 2-9. Table 2-10. Table 2-11. Table 3-1. Table 4-1. Table 4-2. Table 4-3. Table 5-1. Table 5-2. Table 6-1. Table 6-2. Table 6-3. Table 6-4. Table 6-5. Table 6-6. Table 6-7. Table 6-8. Table 6-9. Table 6-10. Table 6-11. Table 6-12. Table 6-13. Table 6-14. Table 6-15. Table 6-16. Table 6-17. Table 6-18. Table 6-19. Table 6-20. Table 6-21. Table 6-22. Table 6-23. Table 6-24. Table 6-25. Table 6-26. Table 6-27. Table 6-28. Tributaries for Channelized DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 MX3112 System Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 LED Status for Active MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 LED Status for Standby MX3112 Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 MX3112 Equipment Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Maximum Current Draw - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Heat Dissipation - Copper Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Maximum Current Draw - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Heat Dissipation - DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Fuse Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Amphenol Connector Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 MX3 Chassis (P/N 1189001L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 MX3112 Controller Card (P/N 1189901L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (P/N 1189902L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 MX3 Fan Module (P/N 1189007L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Amphenol Connector Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Ethernet Pin Assignments for Ports 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Default Provisioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Additional Default Provisioning Options for DS3 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 MX3112 Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 MX3112 Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Application Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 DS3 Interface Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Equipment Identification Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 DS1 Port Interfaces Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60 DS1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 DS1 Bonding Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67 DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 DS1 Timing Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 DS1 Timing Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 DS1 Timing Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75 Link Identifiers Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77 Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78 Bonding Groups Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80 Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81 Packet Flows Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Packet Flows Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85 Sort By Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88 Quick-Set Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Ethernet Client Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 Traffic Classes Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
xiv
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Tables
Table 6-29. Table 6-30. Table 6-31. Table 6-32. Table 6-33. Table 6-34. Table 6-35. Table 6-36. Table 6-37. Table 6-38. Table 6-39. Table 6-40. Table 6-41. Table 6-42. Table 6-43. Table 6-44. Table 6-45. Table 6-46. Table 6-47. Table 6-48. Table 6-49. Table 6-50. Table 6-51. Table 6-52. Table 6-53. Table 6-54. Table 6-55. Table 6-56. Table 6-57. Table 6-58. Table 6-59. Table 6-60. Table 6-61. Table 6-62. Table 6-63. Table 6-64. Table 6-65. Table 6-66. Table 6-67. Table 6-68. Table 6-69. Table 6-70. Table 6-71. Table 6-72. Table 6-73. Table 6-74. Table 6-75. Table 6-76. Table 6-77. Table 6-78. Table 6-79. Table 6-80. Table 6-81. Table 6-82. Table 6-83.
Traffic Classes Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 Equipment Protection Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 General Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 Network Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Management Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101 Management Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103 Network Service Ports Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 SNMP Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106 Trap Host Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108 Trap Host Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109 Auto Save Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110 Security Administration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111 Users Currently Logged On Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112 Edit Accounts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113 Edit Accounts Menu Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113 Edit User Accounts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114 Edit User Account Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115 Quick Setup Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118 Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123 Controller Equipment Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124 Status for Active Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124 Status for Standby Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125 Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125 DS3 Status Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126 Alarm Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127 Remote System Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128 DS2 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129 DS3 Status Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-129 Environmental Alarms Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130 Environmental Alarm External Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-131 Ethernet Client Ports Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132 DS1 Ports Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133 DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136 DS1 Port States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-139 DS1 Port Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140 Bonding DS1s Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142 Bonded DS1 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142 Bonding DS1s Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143 DS1 Tributary Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144 DS3 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145 DS1s in DS3 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146 DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147 Test Alarm Relays Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150 Performance Monitoring Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152 DS3 Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-153 DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-154 DS3 Far End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-155 Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-162 Far End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-163 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-164 DS1 Port Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-165 DS1 # Port Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
xv
Table 6-84. Table 6-85. Table 6-86. Table 6-87. Table 6-88. Table 6-89. Table 6-90. Table 6-91. Table 6-92. Table 6-93. Table 6-94. Table 6-95. Table 6-96. Table 6-97. Table 6-98. Table 6-99. Table 6-100. Table 6-101. Table 6-102. Table 6-103. Table 6-104. Table 6-105. Table 6-106. Table 6-107. Table 6-108. Table 6-109. Table 6-110. Table 6-111. Table 6-112. Table 6-113. Table 6-114. Table 6-115. Table 6-116. Table 6-117. Table 6-118. Table 6-119. Table 6-120. Table 6-121. Table 6-122.
Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-167 Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-169 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170 DS1 Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-172 DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-173 DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-175 Near End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176 Far End Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-177 Near End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-182 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-183 Far End Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-184 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-185 Bonding Group Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186 Bonding Group # Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-187 Bonding Group Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188 Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-190 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-191 Ethernet Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-192 Ethernet Port # Stats Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-193 Ethernet Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-194 Thresholds Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-197 Threshold and Alarm Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-198 System Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-199 Master Alarms Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-200 Master Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-201 Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-202 Controller Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-203 User-Definable Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-204 Environmental Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-205 Auxiliary Input Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-206 Power Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-207 Remote Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-208 Firmware Upgrade Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-209 Method Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-210 Method Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211 TFTP Update Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211 TFTP Update Status Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-212 TFTP Download Progress Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213 TFTP Update Status Screen Hot Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-213
xvi
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 1 Introduction
DESCRIPTION
The MX3112 system (see Figure 1-1) bonds DS1s together to enable Ethernet service delivery over multiple copper DS1 facilities. The MX3112 system bonds up to twelve or sixteen DS1s, depending on the controller card, into bonding groups to conduct Ethernet traffic from four 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports. The MX3112 controller card, P/N 1189901L1, supports up to 12 bonded DS1s. The MX3112 controller card, P/N 1189901L2, supports up to 16 bonded DS1s. The 1 RU chassis (P/N 1189001L1) provides circuit protection via redundant MX3112 controller cards. As shown in Figure 1-1, the MX3112 system is composed of the following components: Redundant or non-redundant MX3112 controller cards A module in expansion slot A that provides connectivity for the four 10/100Base-T Ethernet facilities
MX3 Fan Module
MX3112 Controller Card
MX3 4-Port Ethernet Module
MX3 Chassis
Figure 1-1. MX3112 System Front Panel The MX3112 system supports two basic modes of operation: copper (DS1) mode and DS3 mode. In copper mode, twelve bonded DS1s are directly accessible via amphenol connectors on the rear side of the chassis. In DS3 mode, twelve or sixteen DS1s, depending on the controller card, are multiplexed into a channelized DS3 as described in Table 1-1.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-1
Table 1-1. Tributaries for Channelized DS3

Tributaries 1 - 12 13 - 24 25 - 28 Description These tributaries are cross connected to the twelve physical DSX-1 ports on the amphenol connectors of the chassis available for carrying TDM traffic. These tributaries are available for bonding together into groups for carrying Ethernet traffic. For MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L1), these tributaries are not used. For MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L2), these tributaries are available for bonding together into groups for carrying Ethernet traffic.
Table 1-2 lists the products used when operating in both copper mode and DS3 mode. For detailed specification information on the products listed, refer to the Section 2, Engineering Guidelines. Table 1-2. MX3112 System Part Numbers
Part Number 1189001L1 1189901L1 1189901L2 1189902L1 1189007L1 1189005L1 1189006L1 Description MX3 Chassis MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 12 bonded DS1s) MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 16 bonded DS1s) MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (MX3ETH4) MX3 Fan Module MX3 Controller Blank Plug MX3 Module Blank Plug CLEI M3M2A00A_ _ M3CU100B_ _ M3CU180B_ _ M3LIPC0A_ _ M3CU270B_ _ N/A N/A
1-2
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 1, Introduction - Features
FEATURES
The major features of the MX3112 system are as follows: Chassis supports dual controller slots and two expansion slots Rack-mountable chassis (19-inch or 23-inch racks) Compact 1 RU size Hot-swappable controller cards provide 1:1 redundancy Bonds up to twelve or sixteen DS1s, depending on the controller card, into up to four bonding groups for Ethernet delivery Supports four 10/100Base-T Ethernet facilities Supports two primary modes of operation (copper mode and DS3 mode) Provides graceful handling of impairments of bonded DS1s Provides monitoring of differential delay (skew) on bonded DS1s Supports a variety of VLAN tag manipulation options (push, pop, swap) Supports rate limiting of traffic Supports a variety of class of service features for Ethernet traffic prioritization Supports a variety of transmit timing options for bonded DS1s Supports a variety of methods of management VT100 menus via front panel RS-232 craft port VT100 menus of a remote MX3112 system accessible via an in-band channel from a local MX3112 system or OPTI-6100 GEFM module Ethernet connectivity providing VT100 menus, TL1, and SNMP access either locally via a RJ-45 10/100Base-T Ethernet port on the chassis or remotely via a VLAN on a designated bonding group or customer Ethernet port Supports a comprehensive suite of loopbacks and other test features Supports a comprehensive suite of performance monitoring statistics for all interfaces Supports a large variety of applications involving other MX3112 systems and the OPTI6100 GEFM module (P/N 1184535L1) NEBS Level 3 compliant Powered via 24 VDC or 48 VDC Extended temperature range, 40C to +65C Wire-wrap pins available for critical, major, and minor alarm indications Four auxiliary alarm inputs, any of which can be designated as alarm cut-off (ACO) Dual independent power feeds with separate return paths to all card slots
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-3
DATA PATH DESCRIPTION

The MX3112 system supports two basic modes of operation: copper mode and DS3 mode. The block diagrams that follow describe the operation of the MX3112 system in each mode. The default mode is copper mode.
Copper Mode Block Diagram

When operating in copper mode, the MX3112 system directly routes twelve bonded DS1s to the amphenol interfaces on the rear of the chassis. The integrated M13 multiplexer and the DS3 interface are effectively unused when operating in copper mode as shown in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-3 illustrates the functional block diagram of the MX3112 system when operating in copper mode.
Port 1 Port 2
Bonding Groups
Cross-connect
DS1s
MX3ETH4 4-Port 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Module

Ethernet Ports
MX3ETH4
1189902L1
Port 3 Port 4
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
M13 mux and DS3 interface are not used
G1
P1
PHY PHY PHY PHY
DS1 Framers
Bonding Engine
G2
P2
Switch
G3 G4 P3 P4
DS3A
DS3 LIU
DS1 LIUs
DS1 #1 DS1 #2 DS1 #3 DS1 #4 DS1 #5 DS1 #6 DS1 #7 DS1 #8 DS1 #9 DS1 #10 DS1 #11 DS1 #12
(Controller Card)
Figure 1-2. Copper Mode Block Diagram
1-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description
Port 1 Port 2 MX3ETH4 4-Port 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Module

MX3ETH4
1189902L1
Port 3 Port 4
DS1s
Bonding Groups Ethernet Ports
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
G1
P1
PHY PHY PHY PHY
DS1 DS1 LIUs LIU LIUs
DS1 DS1 Framers F Framers
Bonding Bonding Engine Engine
G2
P2
Switch
G3 G4 P3 P4
(Controller Card)
Figure 1-3. Copper Mode Block Diagram
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-5
DS3 Mode Block Diagram

When operating in DS3 mode, the MX3112 system supports a full M13 multiplexer of which the DS1 tributaries carry both TDM traffic and bonded traffic. The channelized DS3 that is produced operates in either C-bit or M13 framing modes. The first twelve DS1 tributaries of the DS3 are available for carrying TDM traffic and are directly accessible via the amphenol connectors on the rear side of the chassis. The remaining DS1 tributaries, 13 through 28, are available for bonding together to carry Ethernet traffic from the four Ethernet ports. The MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L1) makes use of twelve of these tributaries (13-24) for bonding, with the remaining four tributaries (25-28) unused. The MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L2) makes use of all sixteen of the remaining DS1 tributaries for bonding. The diagrams to follow illustrate the functional block diagram of the MX3112 system when operating in DS3 mode. Figure 1-4 illustrates the MX3112 system using the controller card (P/N 1189901L1), and Figure 1-5 illustrates the MX3112 system using the controller card (P/ N 1189901L2).
Port 1 Port 2
Bonding Groups
DS1s

MX3ETH4
1189902L1
Port 3 Port 4
DS1 trib #13 DS1 trib #14 DS1 trib #15 DS1 trib #16 DS1 trib #17 DS1 trib #18 DS1 trib #19 DS1 trib #20 DS1 trib #21 DS1 trib #22 DS1 trib #23 DS1 trib #24
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
G1
P1
PHY PHY PHY PHY
DS1 Framers
Bonding Engine
G2
P2
Switch
G3 G4 P3 P4
DS3A
DS3 LIU
DS1 LIUs
(Controller Card)
Figure 1-4. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L1
1-6
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Port 1 Port 2
Bonding Groups
DS1s

MX3ETH4
1189902L1
Port 3 Port 4
DS3A
DS3 LIU
DS1 trib #13 DS1 trib #14 DS1 trib #15 DS1 trib #16 DS1 trib #17 DS1 trib #18 DS1 trib #19 DS1 trib #20 DS1 trib #21 DS1 trib #22 DS1 trib #23 DS1 trib #24 DS1 trib #25 DS1 trib #26 DS1 trib #27 DS1 trib #28
PORT 1
PORT 2
PORT 3
PORT 4
G1
P1
PHY PHY PHY PHY
DS1 Framers
Bonding Engine
G2
P2
Switch
G3 G4 P3 P4
DS1 LIUs
(Controller Card)
Figure 1-5. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L2 Table 1-3 shows the mapping and bonding group assignments for DS3 Mode for the MX3112 system when using the controller card (P/N 1189901L1). Table 1-4 shows the mapping and bonding group assignments when using the controller card (P/N 1189901L2). Table 1-3. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L1)
DS3 Tributary 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Assignment DSX-1 Port 1 DSX-1 Port 2 DSX-1 Port 3 DSX-1 Port 4 DSX-1 Port 5 DSX-1 Port 6 DSX-1 Port 7 DSX-1 Port 8 DSX-1 Port 9 DS3 Tributary 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Assignment User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group DS3 Tributary 25 26 27 28 Assignment N/A N/A N/A N/A
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-7
Table 1-3. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L1)
DS3 Tributary 10 11 12 Assignment DSX-1 Port 10 DSX-1 Port 11 DSX-1 Port 12 DS3 Tributary 22 23 24 Assignment User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group DS3 Tributary Assignment
Table 1-4. Mapping and Bonding Group Assignments (for P/N 1189901L2)
DS3 Tributary 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Assignment DSX-1 Port 1 DSX-1 Port 2 DSX-1 Port 3 DSX-1 Port 4 DSX-1 Port 5 DSX-1 Port 6 DSX-1 Port 7 DSX-1 Port 8 DSX-1 Port 9 DSX-1 Port 10 DSX-1 Port 11 DSX-1 Port 12 DS3 Tributary 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Assignment User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group DS3 Tributary 25 26 27 28 Assignment User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group User Assigned Bonding Group
Data Path Provisioning

The MX3112 system is flexible for a wide variety of applications and supports a user interface designed to simplify and expedite the process of provisioning the data path. This section briefly describes the most important steps for provisioning the system. More detailed explanations of certain features are available in the Data Path Provisioning on page 5-5. The Quick Setup Menu The MX3112 supports several provisioning options to assist with optimizing the data path for a specific application. To help expedite the process of turning up the system, the Quick Setup menu is designed to provide fast access to the options that are often most critical for provisioning the data path.
1-8
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Application Mode: COT vs. RT The application mode of the MX3112 has two components: The basic data path configuration (copper mode or DS3 mode) The administrative role of the system (COT mode or RT mode) The first component of the application mode (copper/DS3) is described in the Copper Mode Block Diagram on page 1-4 and the DS3 Mode Block Diagram on page 1-6. The second component of the application mode (COT/RT) typically reflects the location and role of the system in a network in relation to the far end equipment that terminates the bonded DS1s. It is useful to note at this point that, in general, the near end MX3112 system is provisioned as COT and the far end (remote) system is provisioned as RT. A benefit of this component of the application mode is that it allows automatic provisioning of assignments of DS1s to bonding groups at the RT system to reflect the provisioning at the COT system. That is, certain key provisioning options will be transferred automatically from the COT system to the RT system, thereby expediting the turn-up process. Data Path Provisioning: DS1-to-Group Assignments and Flows After provisioning the application mode of the system (copper/DS3 mode and COT/RT mode), two primary steps are involved in provisioning the data path. 1. Assign DS1s to bonding groups. 2. Provision a set of rules (called flows) to route traffic among the Ethernet ports and bonding groups. As shown in Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-5, the MX3112 system contains a switch component that effectively has 8 ports. Four of these ports (P1 - P4) are associated with the four customer 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports, which are accessible via the MX3ETH4. The remaining four ports (G1 - G4) are bonding groups. Provision each of the four bonding groups to consist of one or more DS1s. Assign the DS1s that are available for bonding in any combination among the four bonding groups. Step 1: Assign DS1s to Bonding Groups Use the Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7, to accomplish the first step of provisioning the data path. The Quick Setup menu adapts to reflect the provisioned application mode (copper/DS3). Figure 1-6 illustrates the Quick Setup menu when the MX3112 system is operating in copper mode. This example shows three physical DS1s assigned to each of the four bonding groups.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-9
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Quick Setup Application Mode 1 - COT/RT 2 - Copper/DS3
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: COT : Copper
Ethernet Client Ports 3 - Select Ethernet Client Ports 4 - Packet Flows System 5 - Management Mode 6 - IP Address 7 - Subnet Mask 8 - Gateway 9 - Date 10 - Time 11 - System ID Selection :
: : : : : : :
Local 10.100.51.94 255.255.255.0 10.100.51.254 04/18/2006 14:03:15 MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Bonding Group 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
'?' - System Help Screen
Figure 1-6. Bonding Group Assignment Example (Copper Mode) Figure 1-7 illustrates the Quick Setup menu when the MX3112 system is operating in DS3 mode. This example shows three DS1 tributaries, within the DS3, assigned to each of the four bonding groups.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Quick Setup Application Mode 1 - COT/RT 2 - Copper/DS3
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: COT : DS3
: : : : : : :
Local 10.100.51.94 255.255.255.0 10.100.51.254 04/18/2006 14:15:42 MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Bonding Group 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
Figure 1-7. Bonding Group Assignment Example (DS3 Mode)
1-10
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Step 2: Provision Flows Use the Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 1-8, to accomplish the second step of provisioning the data path, provisioning flows. In general, a flow specifies the criteria for a unidirectional data stream from a designated source port (or group) to a destination port (or group). The criteria that can be provisioned for a flow include the following: Search for specific combinations of source port (or group) and VLAN ID Forward the traffic for the given flow to a specified destination port or group Manipulate VLAN tags (push, pop, swap) and enable/disable priority inheritance for added tags Enforce bandwidth limitations (rate policing) Enforce class of service restrictions Figure 1-8 illustrates an example of a simple flow configuration. In this example, two flows are provisioned to route all traffic bidirectionally between Port 1 and Group 1 with bandwidth restrictions in effect.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows Page 1 of 1 Src Dest Port/ Src Committed Burst CoS Port/ Tag New New Flow Group VID Rate (kbps) Rate (kbps) Class Group Manip VID Prio 1 P1 2000 2500 1 G1 None 2 G1 2000 2500 1 P1 None ----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------
3 - Add New Flow Selection: (N)ext (P)revious (F)irst (L)ast (S)ort (Q)uick-Set
Legend: G = Group
P = Port
Figure 1-8. Flow Configuration Example Flows can be provisioned with a great deal of flexibility, where traffic can be routed among any Ethernet port and bonding group. Refer to Data Path Provisioning on page 5-5 for a more complete explanation of flows.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-11
FRONT PANEL
The MX3112 controller card has nine LEDs located on the front of the unit (see Figure 1-9) that display status information. Table 1-5 shows the LED status descriptions for the active MX3112 controller cards. Table 1-6 shows the status descriptions for the standby controller card.
Figure 1-9. MX3112 Controller Card LEDs Table 1-5. LED Status for Active MX3112 Controller Card
LED
ACT
LED State Green / 4 Green/Amber (Alternating) Red (Flashing) Amber / Red/Amber (Alternating) Green Red 4 Red (Flashing) Off Green Red 4 4 / Red (Flashing) Red (Flashing once per event) Red/Green (Alternating) Amber 4 Amber (Flashing) Off Green Red
Card Condition Normal (All OK) Normal and console open Card has failed Software update in progress Card has failed and console open No critical, major, or minor alarms Major or minor alarm in progress Critical alarm in progress Copper (DSX-1) mode selected Normal (DS3 OK) AIS, OOF, RAI, or Idle DS3 LOS Single/Burst DS3 code violations during previous second DS2 OOF In test (locally originated) In test (remotely originated) All DSX-1 ports are disabled Enabled DSX-1 ports normal (All OK) Non-critical alarm (AIS) on an enabled DSX1 port
ALM
DS3
DSX-1 STAT
1-12
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 1, Introduction - Front Panel
Table 1-5. LED Status for Active MX3112 Controller Card (Continued)
LED LED State 4 4
DSX-1 TEST
Card Condition LOS on an enabled port Single/Burst RX DSX-1 code violations during previous second No DSX-1 tests in progress Single/Burst pattern errors on DSX-1 test In test (locally originated) In test (remotely originated) Link not established Link established
Red (Flashing) Red (Flashing once per event) Off
Red (Flashing once per event) Amber
4
ETHERNET 1-4
Amber (Flashing) Off Green
Table 1-6. LED Status for Standby MX3112 Controller Card

LED
ACT
LED State 4 Green (Flashing) Amber 4 4 Amber (Flashing) Red (Flashing) Off Off Off Off Off
Card Condition Normal (All OK) Software update in progress Not ready or software mismatch Card failure Permanent state during standby Permanent state during standby Permanent state during standby Permanent state during standby Permanent state during standby
ALM DS3 DSX-1 STAT DSX-1 TEST ETHERNET 1-4
ACO Button
The ACO (alarm cut off) button disables any audible alarms. Any active visual alarms remain active. Press the ACO button on the front panel to disable any audible alarms.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
1-13
This page is intentionally blank.
1-14
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 2 Engineering Guidelines

INTRODUCTION
This section provides engineering guidelines for network designers who are incorporating an MX3112 system into their network. This section provides the following guidelines: Dimensions of Equipment on page 2 System Power Requirements on page 3 System Configurations for Copper Mode on page 3 System Configurations for DS3 Mode on page 4 Fuse Recommendations on page 5 Network Connections on page 5 DSX-1 Connections on page 6 Compliance on page 7
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
2-1
DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENT
Table 2-1 provides the dimensions and weights of the MX3112 equipment. Table 2-1. MX3112 Equipment Dimensions and Weights
Part Number 1189001L1 Equipment MX3 Chassis Dimensions Height: 1.7 inches Width: 17.0 inches Depth: 8.6 inches Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches Height: 0.7 inches Width: 5.2 inches Depth: 7.6 inches Height: 1.7 inches Width: 1.5 inches Depth: 7.6 inches Height: 0.7 inches Width: 9.4 inches Depth: 7.6 inches Height: 0.7 inches Width: 5.2 inches Depth: 7.6 inches Weight 5.50 pounds
1189901L1
MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 12 bonded DS1s) MX3112 Controller Card (supports up to 16 bonded DS1s) MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module MX3 Fan Module
1.20 pounds
1189901L2
1.20 pounds
1189902L1
1.20 pounds
1189007L1
0.50 pounds
1189005L1
MX3 Controller Blank Plug
1.00 pounds
1189006L1
MX3 Module Blank Plug
0.50 pounds
2-2
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - System Power Requirements
SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS

The following sections detail the power requirements for the MX3112 system in copper mode and DS3 mode.
System Configurations for Copper Mode

Table 2-2 and Table 2-3 provide the maximum current draw and heat dissipation at 48 VDC (operating range of 42 VDC to 60 VDC) and 24 VDC (operating range of 22 VDC to 27 VDC) for the different MX3112 system configurations in copper mode. Table 2-2. Maximum Current Draw - Copper Mode
Part Number Quantity Maximum Current Draw at 48 VDC at 24 VDC
MX3112 (non-redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 1 1 1 MX3112 (redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 2 1 1 0.69 amps 1.36 amps 0.45 amps 0.90 amps
Table 2-3. Heat Dissipation - Copper Mode

Part Number Quantity Heat Dissipation at 48 VDC at 24 VDC
MX3112 (non-redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 1 1 1 MX3112 (redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 2 1 1 29.8 watts 30.0 watts 19.2 watts 19.7 watts
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
2-3
System Configurations for DS3 Mode

Table 2-4 and Table 2-5 provide the maximum current draw and heat dissipation at 48 VDC (operating range of 42 VDC to 60 VDC) and 24 VDC (operating range of 22 VDC to 27 VDC) for the different MX3112 system configurations in DS3 mode. Table 2-4. Maximum Current Draw - DS3 Mode
Part Number Quantity Maximum Current Draw at 48 VDC at 24 VDC
MX3112 (non-redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 1 1 1 MX3112 (redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 2 1 1 0.74 amps 1.43 amps 0.50 amps 1.00 amps
Table 2-5. Heat Dissipation - DS3 Mode

Part Number Quantity Heat Dissipation at 48 VDC at 24 VDC
MX3112 (non-redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 1 1 1 MX3112 (redundant) 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 2 1 1 31.5 watts 31.7 watts 21.0 watts 21.9 watts
2-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - Network Connections
Fuse Recommendations
Table 2-6 provides data for determining the fuse needed for the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis. Table 2-6. Fuse Recommendations
System Voltage 48 VDC 24 VDC Recommended Fuse 1.5 amps, slow-blow 3.0 amps, slow-blow
NETWORK CONNECTIONS
WARNING The DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces must not be metallically connected to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring.
Cable Specifications
NOTE Connect DS3 interfaces using coaxial cables that have shields grounded at both ends. All coaxial cable for the MX3112 DS3 signals should meet the following minimum specifications. The coaxial cable should have characteristic impedance of 75 ohms. Nominal mutual capacitance should not exceed 20.4 pF/foot. The cable should conform to ANSI standard T1.102 (1993) pulse mask definition. The standard reference cable is a WECO Type 728A at 450 feet. Approved cable types include the following: WECO 728A Lucent 728B Lucent 734A Lucent 735A (maximum length of 250 feet) Belden 9231 Belden 1809A
61189901L1-1A PRELIMINARY 2-5
DSX-1 CONNECTIONS
WARNING The DS3, Alarm, DSX-1, and Ethernet interfaces must not be metallically connected to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring. Table 2-7 provides the amphenol connector pin assignments for the MX3112 controller card. Table 2-7. Amphenol Connector Pin List
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 32 Function Ring Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 3 Ring 4 Ring 5 Ring 6 Ring 7 Ring 8 Ring 9 Ring 10 Ring 11 Ring 12 FGND Tip Tip 1 Tip 2 Tip 3 Tip 4 Tip 5 Tip 6 Tip 7 Tip 8 Tip 9 Tip 10 Tip 11 Tip 12 FGND Pin 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 64
2-6
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 2, Engineering Guidelines - Compliance
COMPLIANCE
The MX3112 system complies with NEBS Level 3 and is NRTL Listed to UL 60950. It is intended to be installed in a restricted access area only. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes and modifications not expressly approved by ADTRAN could void the users authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION Per GR-1089-CORE October 2002, Section 9, this system is designed and intended only for installation in a DC-C (common) Bonding and Grounding system. It is not intended or designed for installation in a DC-I (isolated) Bonding and Grounding system. The ground wire must be of equal or greater ampacity than the wire connected to the VDC return.
CAUTION The MX3112 controller card must be installed in a MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1) with a top assembly revision of C or later. Table 2-8 through Table 2-11 provide the compliance codes for the different components of the MX3112 system. Table 2-8. MX3 Chassis (P/N 1189001L1)
Code Power Code (PC) Telecommunication Code (TC) Installation Code (IC) Input F A Output C
Table 2-9. MX3112 Controller Card (P/N 1189901L1)

61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
2-7
Table 2-10. MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module (P/N 1189902L1)

Table 2-11. MX3 Fan Module (P/N 1189007L1)

Code Power Code (PC) Telecommunication Code (TC) Installation Code (IC) Input F A Output
2-8
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 3 Application Guidelines

INTRODUCTION
The MX3112 can operate in a variety of applications with other MX3112 systems, as well as with the OPTI-6100. This section describes some of the more common applications as follows: Bookend MX3112s - Copper Mode on page 2 Bookend MX3112s - DS3 Mode on page 3 OPTI-6100 and MX3112s (Copper Mode and DS3 Mode) on page 4 This section provides illustrations that describe both the physical connectivity of the interfaces and the logical connectivity of the bonding groups.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
3-1
BOOKEND MX3112S - COPPER MODE

Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 show an example configuration of two MX3112 systems operating in copper mode that are connected in a back-to-back (bookend) configuration. The twelve DS1s are available for bonding together to carry Ethernet traffic. The bonding groups can each be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s.
(Copper/COT Mode)
(Copper/RT Mode)
10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet

12x DS1
DS1s Bonding Engine
DS1s
12x DS1
10/100 Ethernet
Bonding Engine
10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet
Figure 3-1. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode
Bonding Groups
10/100 Ethernet
(Copper/COT Mode)
P1 G1
(Copper/RT Mode)
(a x DS1) (b x DS1) (c x DS1)
10/100 Ethernet
G1
P1
P2
G2
G2
P2
P3 P4
G3
G3
P3 P4
(d x DS1)
G4 G4
For 1189901L1 and L2 controllers (a+b+c+d) = up to 12
Figure 3-2. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in Copper Mode
3-2
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 3, Application Guidelines - Bookend MX3112s - DS3 Mode
BOOKEND MX3112S - DS3 MODE

Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 show an example configuration of two MX3112 systems operating in DS3 mode that are connected in a back-to-back (bookend) configuration. The channelized DS3 contains DS1 tributaries that can be bonded to carry Ethernet traffic, as well as, DS1 tributaries that are physically accessible from the amphenol connections on the chassis. The bonding groups can each be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s.
(DS3/COT Mode)
(DS3/RT Mode) nx DS1 nx DS1
10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet
10/100 Ethernet
Bonding Engine DS3 DS3
Bonding Engine
12x DS1
12x DS1
For 1189901L1 controllers, n = up to 12 For 1189901L2 controllers, n = up to 16
Figure 3-3. Physical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode
10/100 Ethernet
Bonding Groups (DS1 tribuaries 13-28)

(DS3/COT Mode)
P1 G1
(DS3/RT Mode)
10/100 Ethernet
G1
P1
P2
G2
G2
P2
P3 P4
G3
G3
P3 P4
(d x DS1)
G4 G4
12 X DS1 (DS1 tributaries 1-12)
For 1189901L1 controllers (a+b+c+d) = up to 12 For 1189901L2 controllers (a+b+c+d) = up to 16
Figure 3-4. Logical Configuration of Bookend MX3112s in DS3 Mode

OPTI-6100 AND MX3112S (COPPER MODE AND DS3 MODE)

Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6 show an example configuration of an OPTI-6100, containing a GEFM module, terminating the bonded DS1s of two MX3112 systems. One of the MX3112 systems operates in copper mode and the other operates in DS3 mode. The GEFM module supports a Gigabit Ethernet interface and terminates up to 84 DS1s. The GEFM module supports 30 available bonding groups and can communicate with up to 20 individual MX3112 systems. Each bonding group can be provisioned with a specific number of DS1s. The 84 DS1s from the GEFM can be cross-connected within the OMM to any other module in the OPTI-6100 system. As shown in Figure 3-5, a TRAM module can provide DS3 access and a DS1VME module can provide direct DS1 access to the MX3112 systems. Refer to the applicable OPTI-6100 documentation for how to provision the OPTI-6100.
(Copper/RT Mode)
DS1s
DS1s
10/100 Ethernet
12x DS1
Bonding Engine
Gigabit Ethernet
Bonding Engine
84 x DS1
VT1.5
CrossConnect
(DS3/RT Mode) nx DS1
10/100 Ethernet
Bonding Engine
DS3
DS3
12x DS1
For 1189901L1 controllers, n = up to 12 For 1189901L2 controllers, n = up to 16
Figure 3-5. Physical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s
3-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 3, Application Guidelines - OPTI-6100 and MX3112s (Copper Mode and DS3 Mode)
Bonding Groups
(Copper/RT Mode)
G1 G2 G3 G4 Gigabit Ethernet Port
G1
P1
10/100 Ethernet
G2
P2
G3
P3 P4
(d x DS1)
G4
(DS3/RT Mode)
G5 G6 G7 G8
(e x DS1) (f x DS1) (g x DS1)
G1
P1
10/100 Ethernet
G2
P2
G3
P3 P4
(h x DS1)
G4
VT1.5
DS1 tributaries 1-12 within the DS3
12 x DS1
CrossConnect
Figure 3-6. Logical Configuration of OPTI-6100 and MX3112s
Equipment Required
The equipment needed for the OPTI-6100 and MX3112 configuration is listed in Table 3-1. Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications
Part Number Equipment Quantity
OPTI-6100 Equipment 1184501L1 1184500L1 1184504L3 1184532L1 OPTI-6100 MX Chassis OPTI-6100 System Controller Module OPTI-6100 OC-12 IR ADM Optical Multiplexer Module (OMM) (or equivalent) OPTI-6100 Triple Transmux Tributary Module (TRAM) (or equivalent) 1 1 1 (2 for redundancy) 1 (2 for redundancy)
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
3-5
Table 3-1. Equipment Required - MX3112 Ethernet Transport Applications

Part Number 1184535L1 1184507L2 Equipment OPTI-6100 Gigabit Ethernet Over PDH Fiber Module (GEFM) OPTI-6100 Enhanced Fan Assembly Quantity 1 1
MX3112 Equipment 1189001L1 1189901L1 1189902L1 1189007L1 MX3 Chassis MX3112 Controller Card MX3 4-Port 10/100Base-T Ethernet Module MX3 Fan Module 1 1 (2 for redundancy) 1 1
3-6
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 4 Installation
INTRODUCTION
C A U T I O N !
SUBJECT TO ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE OR DECREASE IN RELIABILITY.
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED.
CAUTION Electronic units can be damaged by ESD. When handling units, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place units in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on units, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded. After unpacking the MX3112 system, inspect it for damage. If damage has occurred, file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service. Refer to Appendix A, Warranty for further information. If possible, keep the original shipping container to return the MX3112 system for repair or for verification of shipping damage.
Required Components
MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1) MX3112 controller card (P/N 1189901L1 or P/N 1189901L2) MX3 4-port 10/100Base-T Ethernet module (P/N 1189902L1) MX3 fan module (P/N 1189007L1) Mounting brackets and screws for 19-inch or 23-inch rack installation Ground lug with nut and lock washer Wire wrap post cover Power cover
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
4-1
Required Tools
Phillips head screwdriver Voltmeter Ohmmeter accurate to 0.1 ohm
INSTALLING THE MX3 CHASSIS

The following sections detail the steps needed to install the MX3 chassis.
Rackmount Installation
For a rackmount installation, perform the following steps: 1. Attach the mounting brackets to the side of the MX3 chassis using the two screws provided for each bracket. For 19-inch rack applications, adjust the bracket so that the larger side of the bracket is flush to the chassis as shown in Figure 4-1. The direction of the bracket and the set of holes used is dependent on the mounting configuration (i.e. flush mount). For 23-inch rack applications, adjust the bracket so that the smaller side of the bracket is flush to the chassis as shown in Figure 4-2. The direction of the bracket and the set of holes used is dependent on the mounting configuration (i.e. flush mount). 2. Use the appropriate rack-type screws to mount the chassis into the rack.
Figure 4-1. 19-inch Rack Applications

4-2 PRELIMINARY 61189901L1-1A
C K
Section 4, Installation - Installing the MX3 Chassis
Figure 4-2. 23-inch Rack Applications
Care should be taken to not upset the stability of the equipment rack after installation is complete.
The unit must be installed in accordance with the requirements of NEC NFPA 70.
Power Connections
To make the power connections for the MX3 chassis, perform the following steps: 1. Connect the frame ground from the frame ground lug on the rear panel of the MX3 chassis to the equipment rack grounding screw using appropriately sized wire that is at least the same gauge as the power wiring. 2. Test the frame ground connection to ensure proper ground. Using a multimeter set to its lowest resistance range, place one lead on the ground strap of the rack and the other on the chassis frame ground terminal. The reading should be less than 0.1 ohm. Readings greater than 0.1 ohm should be further investigated. 3. Make power connections to the MX3 chassis.
61189901L1-1A
WARNING
CAUTION
PRELIMINARY
4-3
NOTE A readily accessible disconnect device, such as a rackmount fuse and alarm panel that is suitably approved and rated, should be incorporated into the fixed wiring. Connect to a reliably grounded 48 VDC or 24 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source. The branch circuit overcurrent protection should be a fuse or circuit breaker rated 48 VDC, 1.5 amp slow-blow or 24 VDC, 3 amp slow-blow. a. Determine which fuse pairs are to supply power to the chassis. b. Remove the fuses from the A and B slots for the pair. c. Connect the ends of one wire between the A CO VDC supply and the PWR A terminal on the MX3 rear panel (see Figure 4-3). d. Connect the three remaining wires in the same manner. Connect the A CO VDC return with RET A; B CO VDC supply with PWR B; and B CO VDC return with RET B.
Figure 4-3. Power Connector 4. Apply power and check voltages. WARNING Installing fuses in the fuse and alarm panel at this stage will provide power to the chassis. There will be power to pins and connectors on the rear panel and inside the chassis. Exercise caution to avoid electrical shock.
4-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
a. Install appropriate fuses in the slots in the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis (see Figure 4-4). b. Using a voltmeter, place the common (normally black) lead on the RET A post of the DC power terminal block and the DC volts (normally red) lead on the PWR A post of the DC power terminal block. For a 48 VDC supply, the reading should be in the operating range of 42 VDC to 60 VDC. For a 24 VDC supply, the reading should be in the range of 22 VDC to 27 VDC. Figure 4-3 illustrates the DC power connector and gives definitions for the connector symbols. c. Repeat the above step for the RET/PWR B connections. d. Remove the fuses from the fuse and alarm panel servicing the MX3 chassis. e. Install the protective cover over the power terminal block.
Figure 4-4. Fuse and Alarm Panel
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
4-5
Rear Chassis Connections

The MX3 chassis rear panel is equipped with the following: 1. Four sets of BNC connectors 2. Ethernet port 3. Wire-wrap pins for alarms (critical, major, and minor) 4. Wire-wrap pins for external auxiliary inputs 5. Two 64-pin female amphenol connectors 6. Terminal strip for DC power feed (A and B) Figure 4-5 illustrates the rear panel and identifies the equipment using the numbered list above.
1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Figure 4-5. MX3 Chassis Rear View
WARNING Do not metallically connect the DS3 (A-D), T/R (DSX-1), Alarm, and Ethernet interfaces to interfaces which connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use as intra-building interfaces only. The addition of Primary Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring. 1. The ETHERNET port is an 8-pin modular connector that provides a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface. For system management, use CAT 5 cable to connect from the Ethernet network into the female RJ-45 port labeled ETHERNET on the MX3 chassis rear panel. 2. The DSX-3 network interfaces are full-duplex circuits provided by eight BNC coaxial cable connections. Connect the DS3 interfaces to the BNC connector labeled A as needed for the MX3112 system. Connect the receive data from the network to the IN connectors. Connect the transmit data from the MX3 chassis to the OUT connectors. NOTE DS3 interfaces must be connected using coaxial cables that have shields grounded at both ends.
4-6
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
3. The DSX-1 interfaces are 64-pin amphenol connectors. These interfaces provide Tx and Rx connections between the unit and equipment such as wire-wrap patch panels, punchdown panels, or breakout panels. Connect the DSX-1 interfaces to the 64-pin T/R (IN) and T/R (OUT) amphenol receptacles (female). The MX3112 system uses T/R (IN)/(OUT) amphenol connectors, pins 1-12 and 33-44, for DSX-1 ports 1-12 as shown in Table 4-1. Table 4-1. Amphenol Connector Pin List
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 32 Function Ring Ring 1 Ring 2 Ring 3 Ring 4 Ring 5 Ring 6 Ring 7 Ring 8 Ring 9 Ring 10 Ring 11 Ring 12 FGND Tip Tip 1 Tip 2 Tip 3 Tip 4 Tip 5 Tip 6 Tip 7 Tip 8 Tip 9 Tip 10 Tip 11 Tip 12 FGND Pin 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 64
NOTE When looking at the back of the chassis, right exit cables are prepared to avoid conflict with the alarm/aux connections, the network management port connection, and the DS3 connections. 4. The alarm connectors connect to the three contacts of a relay on the main board of the MX3112 controller card. Connect the CRIT (critical), MAJOR, and MINOR alarm leads from the fuse and alarm panel to the Common (C), Normally Open (NO), and Normally Closed (NC) wire-wrap terminals on the MX3 chassis rear panel as required (see Figure 4-4). 5. Connect the AUX INPUTS (1-8) used by the MX3112 system for Auxiliary Alarms 1-4. These pins sense open and closed relay contacts. These pins are not polarity sensitive. Table 4-2 shows the pin assignments for the alarm inputs.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
4-7
NOTE Each of the alarm inputs default to a severity level of major. The severity level can be changed on the Environmental Alarms Menu on page 6-91. Any alarm input can also be assigned to function as an alarm cut-off (ACO).
Table 4-2. AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List

AUX Inputs 1 - 8 Pin List AUX Inputs 1,2 3,4 5,6 7,8 Function Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4
6. After steps 4 and 5 have been completed, install the protective cover over the wire-wrap headers. 7. Power may now be applied to the chassis by installing appropriate fuses in the fuse and alarm panel that services the MX3 chassis.
4-8
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 4, Installation - Installing Cards and Modules
INSTALLING CARDS AND MODULES

The MX3112 system is designed with hot-swappable controller cards and modules. This section provides installation procedures for the different components of the MX3112 system. Installing the Fan Module on page 9 Installing the MX3112 Controller Card on page 10 Installing the MX3ETH4 Module on page 11
Installing the Fan Module

The MX3 fan module mounts in the MX3 chassis (P/N 1189001L1). Follow the steps listed below to install the MX3 fan module. Figure 4-6 illustrates the installation of the MX3 fan module. 1. With the screw oriented to the left, insert the MX3 fan module into the MX3 chassis until the MX3 fan module is properly seated in the backplane. 2. Using a flat or phillips-head screwdriver, tighten the screw to secure the MX3 fan module to the MX3 chassis.
Figure 4-6. MX3 Fan Module Installation
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
4-9
Installing the MX3112 Controller Card

This card occupies a controller slot in the MX3 chassis. Follow the steps listed below to install the MX3112 controller card. Figure 4-7 illustrates the installation of the MX3112 controller card. 1. If present, remove the blank plug (P/N 1189005L1) from the appropriate controller slot. WARNING For configurations utilizing a single MX3112 controller card, a blank plug must be installed in the empty controller card slot. 2. Pull the ejector latches on the left and right sides of the controller card front panel from the latched or closed positions. 3. Gently, but firmly, slide the controller card into the upper (B) or lower (A) controller slot taking note of the left and right guide grooves in the chassis. Simultaneously, apply thumb pressure on the left (on the ADTRAN logo) and right (on the part number) of the controller card to ensure a good seat of the controller card pins into the backplane connector. 4. Push the ejector latches to the left/right against the front panel until they latch. The MX3112 controller card initializes and begins a self-test upon insertion into an active MX3 chassis. When the self-test completes, the LEDs reflect the true state of the controller card.
Figure 4-7. MX3112 Controller Card Installation
4-10
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 4, Installation - Installing Cards and Modules
Installing the MX3ETH4 Module

This module occupies expansion slot A in the MX3 chassis. Follow the steps listed to install the MX3ETH4 module. Figure 4-8 illustrates the installation of the MX3ETH4 module. CAUTION The MX3ETH4 module is always installed in expansion slot A of the MX3 chassis. 1. If present, remove the blank plug (P/N 1189006L1) from the appropriate expansion slot. 2. Pull the ejector latch on the left side of the MX3ETH4 module front panel from the latched or closed position. 3. Gently, but firmly, slide the MX3ETH4 module into slot A taking note of the left and right guide grooves in the chassis. Simultaneously, apply thumb pressure on the left (on the ADTRAN logo) and right (to the right of PORT 4) of the MX3ETH4 module to ensure a good seat of the MX3ETH4 module pins into the backplane connector. 4. Push the ejector latch against the front panel until it latches.
Figure 4-8. MX3ETH4 Module Installation Table 4-3 list the Ethernet pin assignments for ports 1 through 4.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
4-11
Table 4-3. Ethernet Pin Assignments for Ports 1 - 4

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function TX+ TX RX+ NC NC RX NC NC
4-12
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 5 Provisioning
INTRODUCTION
This section provides provisioning defaults for copper mode and DS3 mode and provisioning options for the data path of the MX3112 system as follows: Provisioning Defaults on page 1 Data Path Provisioning on page 5
PROVISIONING DEFAULTS
Table 5-1 lists the MX3112 system default provisioning options for copper mode. Additional options are available when the application mode is set to DS3. Table 5-2 lists the default provisioning options for the additional DS3 options. For detailed information on the MX3112 menus, refer to Section 6, User Interface. Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options
Provisioning Option Application Mode COT/RT Copper/DS3 Auto-Provisioning DS1 Port Interfaces State Line Length (feet) Circuit Identifier DS1 Bonding Bonding Group Loopback Detect 1-4 Disabled; CSU; NIU; FDL; CSU + FDL; NIU + FDL Disabled Disabled Disabled; Enabled 0-133; 133-266; 266-899; 399-533; 533655 User defined Enabled 0-133 DS1 Port # COT; RT Copper; DS3 Disabled; Enabled RT Copper Enabled Available Options Default Setting
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
5-1
Table 5-1. Default Provisioning Options (Continued)

Provisioning Option State DS1 Timing Bonding Groups Skew Threshold (ms) XCV Threshold Ethernet Client Ports Ethernet State Provisioned Rate & Duplex Cross-Over Mode Link Follows Group Status Traffic Classes Queue Depth (packets) Classification Mode General Craft Port Baud Rate Date Time Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time System ID Scheduled Card Reset Network Management Management Mode Management VLAN ID Management Port/Group IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Disabled; Local; VLAN 1-4094 Ports 1-4; Groups 1-4 0255.0255.0255.0255 0255.0255.0255.0255 0255.0255.0255.0255 Local 1 Port 1 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 Auto; Disabled; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600; 115200 MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS (24 hour format) Disabled; 1-Min; 5-Min; 10-Min; 15-Min; 30-Min; 45-Min; 60-Min User defined MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS Auto N/A N/A 15-Min System ID Not Set Disabled 1 to 100 Explicit; P-bit 50 Explicit Disabled; Enabled Auto; 10, Half; 10, Full; 100, Half; 100, Full MDI; MDI-X; Auto Disabled; Enabled Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Disabled; 1 to 16 ms Disabled; 1e-8; 1e-7; 1e-6; 1e-5; 1e-4; 1e-3 4 Disabled Available Options IS; OOS Loop; Line; Local Default Setting IS Loop
5-2
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 5, Provisioning - Provisioning Defaults

Provisioning Option Provisioned Rate & Duplex Available Options Auto; 10 Mbps Half Duplex; 10 Mbps Full Duplex; 100 Mbps Half Duplex; 100 Mbps Full Duplex MDI; MDI-X; Auto 1024-65535 1024-65535 1024-65535 0255.0255.0255.0255 Default Setting Auto
Cross-Over Mode TL1 Telnet Port TL1 Raw-TCP Port Secondary Telnet Port TFTP Server SNMP SNMP State SNMP Traps Trap Host 1 Status Trap Host 2 Status Trap Host 3 Status Trap Host 4 Status System Location System Contact Read Community Write Community Test DS1 Port # Test
Auto 2000 2001 2002 0.0.0.0
Disabled; Enabled Disabled; Enabled Valid; Under Creation; Invalid Valid; Under Creation; Invalid Valid; Under Creation; Invalid Valid; Under Creation; Invalid User Defined User Defined User Defined User Defined
Disabled Disabled Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid SysLocation Not Set www.adtran.com public private
No Test; Analog Network; Digital Line; CSU Loopback; CSU LB w/ Pattern; NIU Loopback; NIU LB w/ Pattern; Pattern Test Inactive; Active Disabled; 1 minute; 5 minutes; 10 minutes; 15 minutes; 30 minutes; 45 minutes; 60 minutes QRSS; ALL ONES; ALL ZEROS; 2 IN 8 (2:6); 1 IN 8 (1:7); 2^15-1 INV
No Test
Alarm Relay Test Status Test Timeout
Inactive 5 minutes
Pattern System Alarms Aux #1 - #4 Input Description Aux #1 - #4 Input Level
QRSS
User defined Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical; ACO
AUX #1 - #4 INPUT, respectively Minor
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
5-3

Provisioning Option PWR Bus A - B Input Level Stand-by Controller Removed Level Alarm Chronology Available Options Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical Disabled; Info; Alert; Minor; Major; Critical Ascending; Descending Default Setting Minor Minor Ascending
Table 5-2. Additional Default Provisioning Options for DS3 Mode

Provisioning Option DS3 Interface Tx Framing Tx Clock Source Loopback Detection DS3 Circuit Identifier DS1 Port Interfaces Line Coding Loopback Detection Test DS3 Test DS1 # in DS3 Test No Test; Line Loopback; Digital Loopback; Remote Loopback; Remote ALL T1 No Test; Tributary Loopback; Remote Loopback; Remote Loopback w/ Pattern; CSU Loopback; CSU LB w/ Pattern; NIU Loopback; NIU LB w/ Pattern; Pattern Test No Test No Test AMI; B8ZS Disabled; CSU; NIU B8ZS Disabled C-bit; M23 Loop; Local Disabled; Enabled User defined M23 Local Enabled DS3 A Available Options Default Settings
5-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 5, Provisioning - Data Path Provisioning
DATA PATH PROVISIONING

This section describes the general steps used to provision the data path of the MX3112 system. The data path is provisioned in two primary steps. 1. Assign DS1s to bonding groups. 2. Provision flows to route traffic among the Ethernet client ports and bonding groups. Use the Quick Setup menu to easily complete the first step (assigning DS1s to bonding groups). Use the Packet Flows menu to complete the second step (provisioning flows). The process of adding, editing, and deleting flows from within this menu is designed to be fairly intuitive. Up to 100 flows can be provisioned. To edit or delete a flow, enter the number of the flow on the Packet Flows menu and hit enter. Apply changes or delete the flow using the Edit menu. To add a new flow, choose the option at the bottom of the Packet Flows menu labeled Add New Flow. This option displays a menu that is used to provision the parameters of the flow. NOTE After making changes to the flow in the Packet Flows Add/Edit menu, select the Commit Flow option to apply the changes.
Description of Packet Flows

In the context of the MX3112 system, a packet flow can be described as a unidirectional pointto-point data stream composed of packets that meet the same search criteria and are forwarded to a designated client Ethernet port or a bonding group. When a packet arrives at the MX3112 system, either on a bonding group or on one of the client Ethernet ports, it must be matched up to a packet flow before it can be processed further. When a packet arrives, an examination is made of the source port or group on which the packet arrived and the VLAN ID (VID) in the topmost pre-existing VLAN tag in the packet, if such a tag exists. If the packet matches the corresponding fields in a provisioned flow definition, then the other fields in that flow definition are used to control what happens to that packet. Possible actions performed on a packet include: Classifying the packet into a particular class of service (CoS) in order to affect its priority of transmission Manipulating the VLAN tag information on the packet Potentially dropping the packet if the flow has exceeded preset rate limits Transmitting the packet out a defined destination port or group If an incoming packet matches none of the flow definitions, it is dropped. In the following sections, examples are provided to describe the functionality behind the parameters of a flow.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
5-5
Example 1 In this example, three DS1s are assigned to bonding group 1, and flows are provisioned to conduct traffic between Ethernet port 1 and bonding group 1. The Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 5-1, illustrates the assignments of the DS1s to bonding groups.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Quick Setup Application Mode 1 - COT/RT 2 - Copper/DS3 3 - Auto-Provisioning
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: COT : DS3 : Enabled
: : : : : : :
VLAN 501, Group 1 10.100.51.94 255.255.0.0 10.100.51.254 01/01/2005 12:00:00 Site 1 MX3112
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Bonding Group 1 1 1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Figure 5-1. Quick Setup Menu for Example 1 The Packet Flows menu, as shown in Figure 5-2, contains two provisioned flows that allow traffic to be routed between Ethernet port 1 and bonding group 1.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows Page 1 of 1 Src Dest Port/ Src Committed Burst CoS Port/ Tag New New Flow Group VID Rate (kbps) Rate (kbps) Class Group Manip VID Prio 1 P1 4500 No Limit 3 G1 None 2 G1 0 No Limit 3 P1 None ----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------
Legend: G = Group
P = Port
Figure 5-2. Packet Flows Menu for Example 1

In Figure 5-2, the flow definition number 1 matches packets that arrive on client Ethernet port 1 with any VID or no VLAN tag at all. The source port/group and the source VID are the match fields. The rest of the flow definition details the actions that will be performed on packets that match this definition. The Committed Rate is the bit rate that the MX3112 system will always attempt to reserve for this flow in the port or group to which the packets of the flow are forwarded (G1 in this case). The Burst Rate is the maximum allowed average bit rate for this flow. The CoS Class field specifies that all packets that match this flow will be explicitly classified into class number 3, which is the lowest of the three available explicit priority classes. The Dest Port/Group value specifies that all packets in this flow will exit on bonding group 1. In the case of this example, bonding group 1 is provisioned with three DS1s, which equates to an available data rate of approximately 4500 kbps. Since this is the only flow with packets destined for that bonding group, the committed rate is set to match that available rate. Since there are no other flows competing for the bandwidth, the burst rate is left at its default of no limit. The last three fields specify the tag manipulation that will be performed on the packets in this flow. In this case, the value is none, so the last two fields are not used. This flow essentially takes all packets arriving on client Ethernet port 1 and transmits them out on bonding group 1. In Figure 5-2, The flow definition number 2 works the same way, except in the reverse direction. In this case, the committed rate has been left as the default of 0, because the source bonding group bandwidth of 4500 kbps will never be able to exceed the available bandwidth of the Ethernet port (10000 kbps or 100000 kbps). In this case, rate limiting should never occur. This flow essentially takes all packets arriving on bonding group 1 and transmits them out on client Ethernet port 1.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
5-7
Example 2 In this example, all twelve DS1s are assigned to bonding group 1, and flows are provisioned for bonding group 1 to conduct traffic for Ethernet ports 1 and 2. The Quick Setup menu, as shown in Figure 5-3, illustrates the assignments of all twelve DS1s to bonding group 1.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: COT : DS3 : Enabled
: : : : : : :
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Bonding Group 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Figure 5-3. Quick Setup Menu for Example 2 The Packet Flows menu, as shown in Figure 5-4, contains six provisioned flows that allow traffic on Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to be conducted over bonding group 1. Use the VLAN tags to distinguish the traffic within bonding group 1, and use the class of service options to help prioritize the traffic.
5-8
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows Page 1 of 1 Src Dest Port/ Src Committed Burst CoS Port/ Tag New New Flow Group VID Rate (kbps) Rate (kbps) Class Group Manip VID Prio 1 P1 101 2000 10000 2 G1 Push 1 7 2 P1 227 8000 10000 1 G1 Swap 3 Inh(7) 3 P2 8000 10000 3 G1 Push 2 4 4 G1 1 0 No Limit 3 P1 Pop 5 G1 2 0 No Limit 3 P2 Pop 6 G1 3 0 No Limit 3 P1 Swap 227 Inh(7) ----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------
Legend: G = Group
P = Por
Figure 5-4. Packet Flows Menu for Example 2 In this example, all twelve of the available bonded DS1s have been combined into a single bonding group (group number 1), providing a combined available bandwidth of about 18 Mbps. This allows the various traffic flows to cross utilize bandwidth, meaning that any of the traffic flows can temporarily burst into the bandwidth unused by the other flows on that group. Since Ethernet traffic is typically bursty, this allows more efficient use of the limited TDM channels. Flow definition number 1 matches any packets entering client Ethernet port 1 with a VID of 101 and transmits them out on group 1. The committed and burst rates have been set so that the product will always attempt to reserve 2000 kbps for this flow, but will allow it to burst up to 18000 kbps (the entire group capacity) temporarily if the bandwidth is available. The class of service has been set to the middle priority, 2. Finally, a VLAN tag will be added to all the packets in this flow. The new tag will be pushed or stacked, in addition, to the pre-existing tag, the one with the VID of 101. This new tag is specified to have a VID of 1. Since each VLAN tag also needs a priority value, the New Prio field specifies a value of 7 for the priority field in the new tag. The reciprocal flow to this one, the one that handles packets coming back the other way, is flow number 4. Flow definition number 4 matches packets received on group 1 with a VID of 1 in the top tag, pops (removes) that tag, and sends the packet out port 1. Flow definition number 2 also looks for packets coming in on port 1, but this flow matches packets with a VID of 227. This flow behaves much like flow definition number 1, but there are a few differences. It has a higher committed rate, so it will be allowed more bandwidth in the bonding group. It also has a higher priority CoS class (1 instead of 2), so the packets in this flow will be prioritized ahead of the ones from flow definition number 1. Finally, this flow does a VLAN tag swap instead of a push. It removes the existing tag and replaces it with a new one, which has a VID of 3. For the priority field, this flow definition has the instruction to inherit the priority value from the existing VLAN tag, the one that is being removed. The (7) part of that field specifies a default priority value which would be used if we were operating on untagged traffic, thus no existing priority to inherit. Flow definition number 6 is the reciprocal flow for flow definition number 2.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
5-9
Flow definition number 3 matches all packets arriving on port 2 and transmits them on group 1, adding a new VLAN tag with VID 1, priority 4. This flow has a CoS class of 3, so it will be prioritized behind the other two flows exiting on group 1. Flow definition number 5 is the reciprocal flow. For the device, on the other end of the bonded channel, to be able to distinguish between different flows traveling in the same group, a unique VID must exist on the packet of each flow. This unique VID can be provided by a tag that is added within the MX3112 system, or it can be the VID of the pre-existing tag. Either way, the VID of the top tag is the only way the other device can tell the difference between those packets and perform the appropriate action. Also, the New Prio field does not affect the actual prioritization of the packet by the MX3112 system. That is controlled by the CoS Class field. The New Prio field only controls the p-bit priority value that will be placed into a new VLAN tag.
5-10
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 6 User Interface

INTRODUCTION
This section provides detailed information on the following: System Management on page 6-1 Network Management on page 6-3 Logging on to the MX3112 System on page 6-10 Menu Structure on page 6-11 Menu Navigation on page 6-12 Menu Trees on page 6-12 Menu Descriptions on page 6-47
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
MX3112 system management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. The MX3112 system provides two methods for management access. Craft Interface on page 6-1 Remote Menu on page 6-2
Craft Interface
Connect to the MX3112 system menus through the DB-9 connector, labeled CRAFT, on the front of the MX3112 controller card (see Figure 6-1). A DB-9 straight-through cable is required.
Craft Connection
Figure 6-1. Craft Connection
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-1
Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that emulates a VT100 terminal. Windows programs such as Terminal or HyperTerminal are two such examples in the Windows format, but there are many other adequate, commercially available software packages, virtually all of which allow the PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. Certain configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal for the MX3112 system. 1. Set the parameters of the communications software to the following settings: 115200 baud rate or less 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit No flow control 2. Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate communications port (as opposed to dial up connection). 3. Plug the male end of the data cable into the MX3112 controller card. Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for the equipment.
Remote Menu
The MX3112 system allows remote operation by remotely opening a VT100 menu session to a far end RT system from within a menu session of an associated near end COT system. The COT system, in this case, can be an OPTI-6100 GEFM module or a MX3112 system. The menu access to the RT system is available regardless of how the management mode option is provisioned. Establish a remote menu session to the RT system via the Remote Management menu of the COT system as shown in Figure 6-2. Refer to Remote Management Menu on page 6-208 for more details.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Remote Menu Access 1 - MX3112 REMOTE [Critical]
Selection :
Figure 6-2. Remote Management Menu
6-2
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 6, User Interface - Network Management
NETWORK MANAGEMENT
The MX3112 system supports a management mode option that controls the interface from which Ethernet connectivity is established for managing the system. This option has the following possible settings: Disabled: The system cannot be managed via Ethernet. Management connectivity is supported only via craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is disabled. Local: Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port. VLAN: Management connectivity is supported via craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled. The default value for the management mode is local. When the management mode is set for VLAN, the unit must be provisioned with a valid IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask as would normally be required when the system is managed via the chassis Ethernet port (management mode = local). Some restrictions are enforced for the purposes of guaranteeing that the VLAN designated for management does not conflict with customer Ethernet traffic having the same VLAN ID. No flows may exist in which either the source VID or the new VID equals the provisioned management VLAN ID. Any traffic that is received on a bonding group or customer Ethernet port other than the selected management port/group that contains a top VLAN tag with the management VLAN ID will be discarded. The management mode option is available from within the Quick Setup menu as shown in Figure 6-3.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Quick Setup Application Mode 1 - COT/RT : RT 2 - Copper/DS3 : Copper 3 - Auto-Provisioning : Enabled Ethernet Client Ports 4 - Select Ethernet Client Ports 5 - Packet Flows System 6 - Management Mode 7 - IP Address 8 - Subnet Mask 9 - Gateway 10 - Date 11 - Time 12 - System ID Selection :
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: : : : : : :
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Bonding Group 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4
Figure 6-3. Quick Setup Menu
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-3
Selecting the management mode option navigates the user to the menu shown in Figure 6-4, where three options are presented: Management Mode Management VLAN/ID Management Port/Group The management VLAN ID and the management port/group options are meaningful only when the management mode option is provisioned to VLAN.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Quick Setup->Management Mode
1 - Management Mode Options for VLAN Management 2 - Management VLAN ID 3 - Management Port/Group
: VLAN
: 501 : Group 1
The Management VID may not equal the source VID or new VID of any flows
Selection :
Figure 6-4. Management Mode Menu
6-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Figure 6-5 illustrates the selection menu for the management mode option. The user is restricted from selecting the VLAN option if the provisioned management VLAN ID value conflicts with any existing flows.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Management Mode : VLAN 1 - Disabled 2 - Local 3 - VLAN The Management VID may not equal the source VID or new VID of any flows
Selection :
Figure 6-5. Management Mode Selection Menu Figure 6-6 illustrates the selection menu for the management VLAN ID option. When the management mode option is set for VLAN, the user is restricted from entering a value that conflicts with any existing flows. The value range is 1-4094.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Management VLAN ID : 501 Enter Management VLAN ID:
Figure 6-6. Management VLAN ID Menu
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-5
Figure 6-6 illustrates the selection menu for the management port/group option. The VLAN management interface may be either a bonding group or a customer 10/100 port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Management Port/Group : Group 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Selection :
Figure 6-7. Management Port/Group Menu
6-6
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Example 1
Figure 6-8 illustrates how a remote MX3112 system could be managed by VLAN 501 through a single GEFM. The GEFM is provisioned with flows to route the VLAN between the Gigabit Ethernet port and the bonding group, treating it similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient Class of Service (CoS) on the management VLAN, it is recommended that the flows within the GEFM employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other existing flows. The management mode option of the remote MX3112 system is VLAN.
V101
ROUTER
V501
GigE
V101
Bonding Group (n x DS1)
V501
V101
10/100
10/100
Figure 6-8. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through a GEFM
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-7
Example 2
Figure 6-9 illustrates how a remote MX3112 system can be managed by VLAN 501 through two separate GEFM modules. The two GEFM modules can reside in the same OPTI-6100 system (see Figure 6-9) or the two modules can reside in separate systems. A bonding group of one or more DS1s is used to route the traffic between the two GEFM modules. Each GEFM is provisioned with flows to route this VLAN between the Gigabit Ethernet port and the bonding groups as shown in Figure 6-9, treating it similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient CoS on the management VLAN, it is recommended that the flows within the GEFM employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other existing flows. The management mode option of the remote MX3112 system is VLAN.
ROUTER
V501
V101 GigE
V501 GigE
Bonding Group (n x DS1) V501
V501
V101
10/100
10/100
Figure 6-9. VLAN-Based Management of a Remote MX3112 through Two GEFMs
6-8
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Example 3
Figure 6-10 illustrates how two MX3112 systems can be managed by two separate VLANs, VIDs 501 and 502. The COT MX3112 system is provisioned with flows to route VLAN 501 between one of its client 10/100 Ethernet ports and one of the bonding groups as shown in Figure 6-10, treating this VLAN similarly to any other customer data. To guarantee sufficient CoS for VLAN 501, it is recommended that the flows within the COT MX3112 employ available methods to assign this VLAN sufficient bandwidth and CoS relative to other existing flows. The management mode option for both MX3112 systems is VLAN.
ROUTER
V501 V502 10/100 channel Client 10/100 Channel V502
V501
Client 10/100 Channels
Figure 6-10. VLAN-Based Management of Local and Remote MX3112s
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-9
LOGGING ON TO THE MX3112 SYSTEM

To log on to the MX3112 system, perform the following steps: 1. Establish the physical connection to the MX3112 system using one of the options discussed in System Management on page 6-1. 2. If a craft port session is being used, proceed to step 3. If using a Telnet menu session proceed to step 4. 3. Press ENTER until the logon prompt appears. NOTE The MX3112 system requires the user ID and associated password. 4. Enter the default user ID, ADMIN (or the configured logon name with System Administrator privileges), and press ENTER. 5. Enter the default password, PASSWORD (or the configured password), and press ENTER. NOTE Logon name and password fields are case sensitive. The default values are all uppercase.
NOTE If your username and/or password are forgotten, Adtran Tech Support can assist with logon.
6-10
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 6, User Interface - Menu Structure
MENU STRUCTURE
The MX3112 controller card provides a menu system for the entire MX3112 system. All system-related menus are controlled by the controller card. This subsection explains the methods used to navigate the MX3112 system menus. NOTE To view the MX3112 system menu trees, refer to Menu Trees on page 6-12. The menu structure for the MX3112 system is a layered menu tree. Each layer of the menu tree is displayed as a menu or a screen.
Menu
A menu is a display that provides numbered selections that are used to navigate to related menus, modify provisioning information, or display information screens. A menu can contain the following objects: Menu Option: A menu option is indicated by a number, which when selected navigates the display to another menu layer or is used to change the option setting. Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the MX3112 system. Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified. Keyboard Commands: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function (see Table 6-1). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description (i.e., CTRL+A - acknowledge all alarms).
Screen
A screen is a display that usually indicates the end of a menu tree path. A screen can contain the following objects: Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the MX3112 system. Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified. Keyboard Commands: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function (see Table 6-1). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description (i.e., CTRL+A - acknowledge all alarms).
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-11
MENU NAVIGATION
Basic menu navigation is accomplished by selecting the desired option number and then pressing ENTER. To work backward through the menus press the ESC (escape) key. To access the System Help screen, press the question mark (?) key. Table 6-1 displays the general keyboard commands for the MX3112 system. The System Help screen can be accessed from any MX3112 screen or menu by pressing ?. Table 6-1. MX3112 Keyboard Commands
Keyboard Command BACKSPACE ENTER (or Return) ESC (Escape) Description This keyboard command is used to delete the character to left of the cursor during keyboard input. This keyboard command is used to terminate input. This keyboard command is used to back up to the previous menu and used to clear prompts. This keyboard command is used to acknowledge all alarms This keyboard command is used to logout and disconnect. This keyboard command is used to refresh the display. This keyboard command is used to exit from module menus.
CTRL+A (Control and a) CTRL+C/D (Control and c or d)

CTRL+R (Control and r) CTRL+Z (Control and z)
MENU TREES
This subsection provides a detailed set of menu trees for the MX3112 system. The menu trees are maps that can be used to locate provisioning options with ease. Some of the menu trees span multiple pages, signified by the (continued) at the end of the illustration title. The MX3112 system menu trees are divided by two application modes. Copper Mode on page 6-13 DS3 Mode on page 6-28
6-12
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 6, User Interface - Menu Trees
Copper Mode
1. Configuration MX3112 Main Menu 2. Provisioning
3. Quick Setup
4. Status
5. Test
6. Performance Monitoring
7. System Alarms
8. Remote Management
8. or 9. Firmware Upgrade 1
9. or 10. Logout 2
Denotes that this item only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.
1 Appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode. 2 Appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.
Figure 6-11. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - Copper Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-13
Controller A/B A CLEI Code Part Number Serial Number MAC Address Product Revision Code Version Code Checksum Boot Version Boot Checksum 1. COT 1. COT/RT 2. RT 1. Application Mode 1. Copper 2. Copper/DS3 2. DS3 1. Disabled B 3. Auto-Provisioning 2. Enabled 1. Disabled 1. State 2. Enabled 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 1. 0-133 2. Line Length (feet) 2. 133-266 3. 266-399 2. DS1 Port Interfaces 4. 399-533 5. 533-655 3. Circuit Identifier 1. Copy FROM DS1 Port 13. Copy Provisioning to Multiple State Line Length (feet) Loopback Detection 2. First DS1 Port to Copy TO 3. Last DS1 Port to Copy TO 4. Copy Provisioning I
Denotes that this item only appears when RT is selected in the Application Mode.
Figure 6-12. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode
6-14
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
I 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12
1. Bonding Group 1. Disabled 2. Loopback Detect 2. CSU 3. NIU 3. DS1 Bonding 4. FDL 5. CSU + FDL 6. NIU + FDL 1. IS 3. State 2. OOS
13. DS1 Timing 1. DS1 Timing Mode
1. Loop 2. Line 3. Local 1. Sent Link ID 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 Received Link ID 2. Expected Link ID
14. Link Identifiers 3. Set Expected Equal to Received 13. Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs 1. No Action 14. Link Identifiers 2. Alarm Only 3. Alarm + Link Drop
4. Bonding Groups 1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4
1. Skew Threshold (ms) 1. Disabled 2. XCV Threshold 2. 1e-8 3. 1e-7 4. 1e-6 5. 1e-5 6. 1e-4 7. 1e-3 3. Remote Auto-Provisioned Group
J
Figure 6-12. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - Copper Mode (Continued)
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-15
J 1. Source Port/Group
1. Port 1 2. Port 2 3. Port 3 4. Port 4 5. Packet Flows 1. Add New Flow 1 5. Group 1 6. Group 2 7. Group 3 8. Group 4 2. Source VID 3. Committed Rate (kbps) 4. Burst Rate (kbps) 1. 1 5. Class Of Service 2 2. 2 3. 3 1. Port 1 6. Dest Port/Group 2. Port 2 3. Port 3 4. Port 4 5. Group 1 6. Group 2 7. Group 3 8. Group 4 1. None 7. Tag Manipulation 2. Push 3. Pop 4. Swap 8. New VID 3 9. Priority Inheritance 3 10. New Priority 3 11. Commit Flow
12. Delete Flow 4

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted. 2 This option only appears when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode. 3 These options only appear when Push or Swap is selected in the Tag Manipulation. Option 10 is Default Priority when selecting an existing flow. 4 This option only appears when selecting an existing flow.
6-16
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
K 1. Ethernet State 6. Ethernet Client Ports 1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4
1. Disabled 2. Enabled 1. Auto 2. Provisioned Rate & Duplex 2. 10, Half 3. 10, Full 4. 100, Half 5. 100, Full Functional Rate & Duplex 1. MDI 3. Cross-Over Mode 2. MDI-X 3. Auto 1. Disabled 4. Link Follows Group Status 2. Enabled Link Status
1. - 3. Traffic Class 1 - 3 1 Enter Queue Depth (packets) 7. Traffic Classes 1. - 8. P-bit Priority 0 - 7 2 Enter Queue Depth (packets) 1. Explicit 4. Classification Mode 2. P-Bit 8. Equipment Protection 1. Perform Manual Switch
L
1 These options only appear when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode. 2 These options only appear when P-Bit is selected in the Classification Mode.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-17
L 1. Craft Port Baud Rate
1. Auto 2. Disabled 3. 9600 4. 19200 9. General 5. 38400 6. 57600 7. 115200 Functional Baud Rate 2. Date 3. Time 1. Disabled 4. Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time 2. 1-Min 3. 5-Min 4. 10-Min 5. 15-Min 6. 30-Min 7. 45-Min 8. 60-Min 5. System ID 6. Scheduled Card Reset 7. Card Reset 8. Restore Default Provisioning 10. Network Management 11. Save Provisioning 1. Disabled 12. Auto Save 2. Enabled 1. Users Currently Logged On 13. Security Administration 2. Edit User Accounts 2. READONLY 3. READWRITE 3. READ/WRITE 4. TEST 4. ADMIN 3. Access Tech Support Account 4. Restore Default Security Settings 14. Change ADMINs Password 3. Change Password 4. Delete User 2. Access Rights 2. TEST 1. ADMIN 1. Enable/Disable User Account 1. READ
6-18
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Disabled 1. Management Mode 2. Local 1. Management Mode 2. Management VLAN ID M 2. IP Address 3. Subnet Mask 4. Gateway MAC Address 5. TFTP Server 1. Provisioned Rate & Duplex 2. 10 Mbps Half Duplex 3. 10 Mbps Full Duplex 6. Rear Ethernet Interface 4. 100 Mbps Half Duplex 5. 100 Mbps Full Duplex Functional Rate & Duplex 1. MDI 2. Cross-Over Mode 2. MDI-X 3. Auto Link Status 1. TL1 Telnet Port 7. Network Service Ports 2. TL1 Raw-TCP Port 3. Secondary Telnet Port 1. Disabled 1. SNMP State 2. Enabled 8. SNMP 1. Disabled 2. SNMP Traps 2. Enabled 1. Valid 1. Status 2. Under Creation 3. - 6. Trap Host 1 - 4 2. IP 1. Version 1 3. Version 2. Version 2 4. Confirmation Timeout (sec) 5. Confirmation Retries 7. System ID 8. System Location 9. System Contact 10. Read Community 11. Write Community
Denotes that these items only appear when Valid or Under Creation is selected in the Status.
3. VLAN 1. - 4. Port 1 - 4 3. Management Port/Group 5. - 8. Group 1 - 4
1. Auto
3. Invalid
Figure 6-12. Network Management Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. COT 1. COT/RT 2. RT C 2. Copper/DS3 2. DS3 1. Disabled 3. Auto-Provisioning 2. Enabled 1. Disabled 1. Ethernet State 3. or 4. Select Ethernet Client Ports 1 1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4 1. Auto 2. Provisioned Rate & Duplex 2. 10, Half 3. 10, Full 4. 100, Half 5. 100, Full Functional Rate & Duplex 1. MDI 3. Cross-Over Mode 2. MDI-X 3. Auto 1. Disabled 4. Link Follows Group Status 2. Enabled Link Status 4. or 5. Packet Flows 1 (Same As Provisioning\Packet Flows) 1. Disabled 1. Management Mode 2. Local 5. or 6. Management Mode 1 3. VLAN 2. Management VLAN ID 1. - 4. Port 1 - 4 3. Management Port/Group 5. - 8. Group 1 - 4 6. or 7. IP Address 1 7. or 8. Subnet Mask 1 8. or 9. Gateway 1 9. or 10. Date 1 10. or 11. Time 1 11. or 12. System ID 1 12. or 13. - 23. or 24. DS1 Port 1 - 12 1
1 Option # is dependent on whether COT or RT is selected in the Application Mode.
1. Copper
2. Enabled
Figure 6-13. Quick Setup Menu Tree - Copper Mode
6-20
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Controller Equipment D 2. Environmental Alarms 3. Ethernet Client Ports 4. DS1 Ports 5. Bonding Group Status 1. No Test 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 2. Analog Network 3. Digital Line 4. CSU Loopback 5. CSU LB w/ Pattern E 6. NIU Loopback 7. NIU LB w/ Pattern 8. Pattern Test 13. Bonding DS1s 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 2. Line 3. Payload 14. Test Alarm Relays 1. Alarm Relay Test Status 2. Active 15. Reset ALL Tests 1. Disabled 16. Test Timeout 2. 1 minute 3. 5 minutes 4. 10 minutes 5. 15 minutes 6. 30 minutes 7. 45 minutes 8. 60 minutes 1. QRSS 17. Pattern 2. ALL ONES 3. ALL ZEROS 4. 2 IN 8 (2:6) 5. 1 IN 8 (1:7) 6. 2^15-1 INV 1. Inactive 1. No Test
Figure 6-14. Status and Test Menu Trees - Copper Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-21
1. DS1 Port Statistics
F 2. DS1 Bonding Statistics O
3. Bonding Group Statistics
4. Ethernet Client Statistics
5. Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data
6. Reset ALL PM Data
7. Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults
8. Enable ALL PM Thresholds
9. Disable ALL PM Thresholds
Figure 6-15. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - Copper Mode
6-22
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Near End Daily 1. - 12. DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data] 2. Near End Quarter Hourly
1. CV-L 2. ES-L 3. SES-L 4. LOSS-L
3. Near End Daily Thresholds 4. Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds
1. Threshold 1. Disabled 2. Alarm 2. Enabled
5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults 6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds 5. Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset DS1 # PM Data 13. Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data 14. Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data 15. Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds 16. Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds 17. Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds
Figure 6-16. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-23
1. CV-P 2. ES-P 3. SES-P 4. UAS-P
3. Far End Daily 4. Far End Quarter Hourly
1. CV-PFE 2. ES-PFE 3. SES-PFE 4. UAS-PFE
1. CV-P 2. ES-P 3. SES-P 4. UAS-P 5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults
6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Far End Daily Thresholds 8. Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 1. CV-PFE 2. ES-PFE 3. SES-PFE 4. UAS-PFE 5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults 6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds 9. Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data 10. Reset DS1 # PM Data 13. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data 14. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data 15. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 16. Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 17. Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 1. Threshold 1. Disabled 2. Alarm 2. Enabled
Figure 6-17. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode

1. Daily Performance 1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4 2. Quarter Hourly Performance
1. Rx Frames 2. Rx Bytes 3. Rx Errored Events 4. Tx Frames 5. Tx Bytes
3. Daily Thresholds 4. Quarter Hourly Thresholds
1. Rx Frames 2. Rx Bytes 3. Rx Error Events 4. Tx Frames
5. Tx Bytes 6. Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 7. Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 8. Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 5. Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset Bonding Group # PM Data 5. Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data 7. Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 8. Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 9. Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds
Figure 6-18. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-25
1. Daily Performance 1. - 4. Ethernet Port 1 - 4 2. Quarter Hourly Performance
1. Rx Packets 2. Rx Octets 3. Rx CRC & Align Errors 4. Rx Undersize Packets 5. Rx Oversize Packets 6. Rx Collisions 7. Tx Packets 8. Tx Octets
1. Rx Packets 2. Rx Octets 3. Rx CRC & Align Errors 4. Rx Undersize Packets 5. Rx Oversize Packets
6. Rx Collisions 7. Tx Packets 8. Tx Octets 9. Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port 10. Enable Thresholds for selected Port 11. Disable Thresholds for selected Port 5. Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data 5. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data 7. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds 8. Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds 9. Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds
Figure 6-19. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - Copper Mode
6-26
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Master Log G 2. Controller A Controller B 1. AUX # Input Description 1. - 4. Aux #1 - 4 Input 2. AUX # Input Level 2. Info 3. Alert 1. Environmental Alarms 4. Minor 5. Major 6. Critical 7. ACO 5. - 6. PWR Bus A/B Input 1. PWR A/B FAIL Level 2. Info 3. User-Definable Alarms 3. Alert 4. Minor 5. Major 6. Critical 1. Disabled 2. Stand-by Controller Removed Level 2. Info 3. Alert 4. Minor 5. Major 6. Critical 1. Ascending 4. Alarm Chronology 2. Descending 1. Y-Modem 1. TFTP Server 2. TFTP 2. Remote Filename 3. Initiate Transfer 3. Reset Active Controller 1. Disabled 1. Disabled
Controller A H Controller B
Figure 6-20. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - Copper Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-27
DS3 Mode
1. Configuration MX3112 Main Menu 2. Provisioning
3. Quick Setup
4. Status
5. Test
6. Performance Monitoring
7. System Alarms
8. Remote Management
8. or 9. Firmware Upgrade 1
9. or 10. Logout 2
1 Appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode. 2 Appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.
Figure 6-21. MX3112 Main Menu Tree - DS3 Mode
6-28
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Controller A/B A CLEI Code Part Number Serial Number MAC Address Product Revision Code Version Code Checksum Boot Version Boot Checksum 1. COT 1. COT/RT 2. RT 1. Application Mode 1. Copper 2. Copper/DS3 2. DS3 1. Disabled B 3. Auto-Provisioning 2. Enabled 1. C-Bit 1. Tx Framing 2. M23 2. DS3 Interface 1. Loop 2. Tx Clock Source 2. Local 1. Disabled 3. Loopback Detection 2. Enabled 4. DS3 Circuit Identifier 1. Near End Facility ID Code 5. DS3 Equipment Identifier 2. Near End Location ID Code 3. Near End Frame ID Code 4. Near End Unit Code 5. Near End Equipment Code Far End Facility ID Code Far End Location ID Code Far End Frame ID Code Far End Unit Code I
Far End Equipment Code
Figure 6-22. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode

I 1. State
1. Disabled 2. Enabled 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 1. 0-133 2. Line Length (feet) 2. 133-266 3. 266-399 4. 399-533 5. 533-655 3. Line Coding 3. DS1 Port Interfaces 1. AMI 2. B8ZS 1. Disabled 4. Loopback Detection 2. CSU 3. NIU 5. Circuit Identifier 1. Copy FROM DS1 Port 13. Copy Provisioning to Multiple State Line Length (feet) Line Coding Loopback Detection 2. First DS1 Port to Copy TO 3. Last DS1 Port to Copy TO 4. Copy Provisioning
Figure 6-22. Configuration and Provisioning Menu Trees - DS3 Mode (Continued)
6-30
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
J 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12
1. Bonding Group 1. Disabled 2. Loopback Detect 2. CSU 3. NIU 3. DS1 Bonding 4. FDL 5. CSU + FDL 6. NIU + FDL 1. IS 3. State 2. OOS
13. DS1 Timing 1. DS1 Timing Mode
1. Loop 2. Line 3. Local 1. Sent Link ID 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 Received Link ID 2. Expected Link ID
14. Link Identifiers 3. Set Expected Equal to Received 13. Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs 1. No Action 14. Link Identifiers 2. Alarm Only 3. Alarm + Link Drop
5. Bonding Groups 1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4
1. Skew Threshold (ms) 1. Disabled 2. XCV Threshold 2. 1e-8 3. 1e-7 4. 1e-6 5. 1e-5 6. 1e-4 7. 1e-3 3. Remote Auto-Provisioned Group
K
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-31
J 1. Source Port/Group
1. Port 1 2. Port 2 3. Port 3 4. Port 4 5. Packet Flows 1. Add New Flow 1 5. Group 1 6. Group 2 7. Group 3 8. Group 4 2. Source VID 3. Committed Rate (kbps) 4. Burst Rate (kbps) 1. 1 5. Class Of Service 2 2. 2 3. 3 1. Port 1 6. Dest Port/Group 2. Port 2 3. Port 3 4. Port 4 5. Group 1 6. Group 2 7. Group 3 8. Group 4 1. None 7. Tag Manipulation 2. Push 3. Pop 4. Swap 8. New VID 3 9. Priority Inheritance 3 10. New Priority 3 11. Commit Flow
12. Delete Flow 4

1 This option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted. 2 This option only appears when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode. 3 These options only appear when Push or Swap is selected in the Tag Manipulation. Option 10 is Default Priority when selecting an existing flow. 4 This option only appears when selecting an existing flow.
6-32
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
L 1. Ethernet State 7. Ethernet Client Ports 1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4
1. Disabled 2. Enabled 1. Auto 2. Provisioned Link Speed & Duplex 2. 10, Half 3. 10, Full 4. 100, Half 5. 100, Full Functional Link Speed & Duplex 1. MDI 3. Cross-Over Mode 2. MDI-X 3. Auto 1. Disabled 4. Link Follows Group Status 2. Enabled Link Status
1. - 3. Traffic Class 1 - 3 1 Enter Queue Depth (packets) 8. Traffic Classes 1. - 8. P-bit Priority 0 - 7 2 Enter Queue Depth (packets) 1. Explicit 4. Classification Mode 2. P-Bit 9. Equipment Protection 1. Perform Manual Switch
M
1 These options only appear when Explicit is selected in the Classification Mode. 2 These options only appear when P-Bit is selected in the Classification Mode.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-33
M 1. Craft Port Baud Rate
1. Auto 2. Disabled 3. 9600 4. 19200 10. General 5. 38400 6. 57600 7. 115200 Functional Baud Rate 2. Date 3. Time 1. Disabled 4. Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time 2. 1-Min 3. 5-Min 4. 10-Min 5. 15-Min 6. 30-Min 7. 45-Min 8. 60-Min 5. System ID 6. Scheduled Card Reset 7. Card Reset 8. Restore Default Provisioning 11. Network Management 12. Save Provisioning 1. Disabled 13. Auto Save 2. Enabled 1. Users Currently Logged On 14. Security Administration 2. Edit User Accounts 2. READONLY 3. READWRITE 3. READ/WRITE 4. TEST 4. ADMIN 3. Access Tech Support Account 4. Restore Default Security Settings 15. Change ADMINs Password 3. Change Password 4. Delete User 2. Access Rights 2. TEST 1. ADMIN 1. Enable/Disable User Account 1. READ
1. Disabled 1. Management Mode 2. Local 1. Management Mode 2. Management VLAN ID N 2. IP Address 3. Subnet Mask 4. Gateway MAC Address 5. TFTP Server 1. Provisioned Rate & Duplex 2. 10 Mbps Half Duplex 3. 10 Mbps Full Duplex 6. Rear Ethernet Interface 4. 100 Mbps Half Duplex 5. 100 Mbps Full Duplex Functional Rate & Duplex 1. MDI 2. Cross-Over Mode 2. MDI-X 3. Auto Link Status 1. TL1 Telnet Port 7. Network Service Ports 2. TL1 Raw-TCP Port 3. Secondary Telnet Port 1. Disabled 1. SNMP State 2. Enabled 8. SNMP 1. Disabled 2. SNMP Traps 2. Enabled 1. Valid 1. Status 2. Under Creation 3. - 6. Trap Host 1 - 4 2. IP 1. Version 1 3. Version 2. Version 2 4. Confirmation Timeout (sec) 5. Confirmation Retries 7. System ID 8. System Location 9. System Contact 10. Read Community 11. Write Community
Denotes that these items only appear when Valid or Under Creation is selected in the Status.
3. VLAN 1. - 4. Port 1 - 4 3. Management Port/Group 5. - 8. Group 1 - 4
1. Auto
3. Invalid
Figure 6-22. Network Management Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. COT 1. COT/RT 2. RT C 2. Copper/DS3 2. DS3 1. Disabled 3. Auto-Provisioning 2. Enabled 1. Disabled 1. Ethernet State 3. or 4. Select Ethernet Client Ports 1 1. - 4. Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4 1. Auto 2. Provisioned Rate & Duplex 2. 10, Half 3. 10, Full 4. 100, Half 5. 100, Full Functional Rate & Duplex 1. MDI 3. Cross-Over Mode 2. MDI-X 3. Auto 1. Disabled 4. Link Follows Group Status 2. Enabled Link Status 4. or 5. Packet Flows 1 (Same As Provisioning\Packet Flows) 1. Disabled 1. Management Mode 2. Local 5. or 6. Management Mode 1 3. VLAN 2. Management VLAN ID 1. - 4. Port 1 - 4 3. Management Port/Group 5. - 8. Group 1 - 4 6. or 7. IP Address 1 7. or 8. Subnet Mask 1 8. or 9. Gateway 1 9. or 10. Date 1 10. or 11. Time 1 11. or 12. System ID 1 12. or 13. - 23. or 24. DS1 Port 1 - 12 1
1 Option # is dependent on whether COT or RT is selected in the Application Mode.
1. Copper
2. Enabled
Figure 6-23. Quick Setup Menu Tree - DS3 Mode
6-36
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Controller Equipment D 2. DS3 1. Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3 3. Environmental Alarms 4. Ethernet Client Ports 5. DS1 Ports 6. Bonding Group Status 1. No Test 1. - 12. DS1 Port 1 - 12 2. Analog Network 3. Digital Line 4. CSU Loopback 5. CSU LB w/ Pattern E 6. NIU Loopback 7. NIU LB w/ Pattern 8. Pattern Test 13. Bonding DS1s 1. - 12. DS3 Trib 13 - 24 2. Line 3. Payload 1. No Test 14. DS3 2. Line Loopback 3. Digital Loopback 4. Remote Loopback 5. Remote ALL T1 15. DS1s in DS3 1. - 28. DS1s in DS3 2. Tributary Loopback 3. Remote Loopback 4. Remote Loopback w/ Pattern 5. CSU Loopback 6. CSU Loopback w/ Pattern 7. NIU Loopback 8. NIU LB w/ Pattern 9. Pattern Test O 1. No Test 1. No Test
Figure 6-23. Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-37
16. Test Alarm Relays 1. Alarm Relay Test Status
1. Inactive 2. Active
17. Reset ALL Tests 1. Disabled 18. Test Timeout 2. 1 minute 3. 5 minutes 4. 10 minutes 5. 15 minutes 6. 30 minutes 7. 45 minutes 8. 60 minutes 1. QRSS 19. Pattern 2. ALL ONES 3. ALL ZEROS 4. 2 IN 8 (2:6) 5. 1 IN 8 (1:7) 6. 2^15-1 INV
Figure 6-23. Status and Test Menu Trees - DS3 Mode (Continued)
6-38
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. DS3 Statistics
F 2. DS1 Port Statistics Q
3. DS1 Bonding Statistics
4. Bonding Group Statistics
5. Ethernet Client Statistics
6. Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data
7. Reset ALL PM Data
8. Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults
9. Enable ALL PM Thresholds
10. Disable ALL PM Thresholds
Figure 6-24. Performance Monitoring Menu Tree - DS3 Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-39
1. Near End Daily P 2. Near End Quarter Hourly
1. CV-L 2. ES-L 3. SES-L 4. LOSS-L 5. CVP-P 6. ESP-P 7. SESP-P 8. UASP-P 9. CVCP-P 10. ESCP-P 11. SESCP-P 12. UASCP-P
3. Far End Daily 4. Far End Quarter Hourly
1. CVCP-PFE 2. ESCP-PFE 3. SESCP-PFE 4. UASCP-PFE
1. CV-L 2. ES-L 3. SES-L 4. LOSS-L 5. CVP-P 6. ESP-P 7. SESP-P 8. UASP-P 9. CVCP-P 10. ESCP-P 11. SESCP-P 12. UASCP-P 13. Reset selected DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults 14. Enable selected DS3 PM Thresholds 15. Disable selected DS3 PM Thresholds
Figure 6-25. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

7. Far End Daily Thresholds 8. Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds
1. CVCP-PFE 2. ESCP-PFE 3. SESCP-PFE 4. UASCP-PFE 5. Reset selected DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults 6. Enable selected DS3 PM Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS3 PM Thresholds
9. Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data 10. Reset DS3 PM Data
Figure 6-25. DS3 Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode (Continued)
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-41
5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults 6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds 5. Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset DS1 # PM Data 13. Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data 14. Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data 15. Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds 16. Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds 17. Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds
Figure 6-26. DS1 Port Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode
6-42
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Near End Daily 1. - 12. Trib #13 - #24 [PM Data] 2. Near End Quarter Hourly 2. ES-P 3. SES-P 4. UAS-P 3. Far End Daily 1. CV-PFE 4. Far End Quarter Hourly 2. ES-PFE 3. SES-PFE 4. UAS-PFE 5. Near End Daily Thresholds 6. Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 1. CV-P 2. ES-P 3. SES-P 4. UAS-P 5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults R 6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Far End Daily Thresholds 8. Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 1. CV-PFE 2. ES-PFE 3. SES-PFE 4. UAS-PFE 5. Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults 6. Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7. Disable selected DS1 Thresholds 9. Reset Trib # Current Interval PM Data 10. Reset Trib # PM Data 13. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data 14. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data 15. Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 16. Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 17. Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 1. Threshold 1. Disabled 2. Alarm 2. Enabled 1. Threshold 1. Disabled 2. Alarm 2. Enabled 1. CV-P
Figure 6-27. DS1 Bonding Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode

1. Daily Performance 1. - 4. Bonding Group 1 - 4 2. Quarter Hourly Performance
1. Rx Frames 2. Rx Bytes 3. Rx Errored Events 4. Tx Frames 5. Tx Bytes
1. Rx Frames 2. Rx Bytes 3. Rx Error Events 4. Tx Frames
5. Tx Bytes 6. Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 7. Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 8. Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 5. Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset Bonding Group # PM Data 5. Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data 7. Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 8. Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 9. Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds
Figure 6-28. Bonding Group Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode
6-44
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
1. Daily Performance 1. - 4. Ethernet Port 1 - 4 2. Quarter Hourly Performance
1. Rx Packets 2. Rx Octets 3. Rx CRC & Align Errors 4. Rx Undersize Packets 5. Rx Oversize Packets 6. Rx Collisions 7. Tx Packets 8. Tx Octets
1. Rx Packets 2. Rx Octets 3. Rx CRC & Align Errors 4. Rx Undersize Packets 5. Rx Oversize Packets
6. Rx Collisions 7. Tx Packets 8. Tx Octets 9. Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port 10. Enable Thresholds for selected Port 11. Disable Thresholds for selected Port 5. Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data 5. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data 6. Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data 7. Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds 8. Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds 9. Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds
Figure 6-29. Ethernet Client Statistics Menu Tree - DS3 Mode
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-45
1. Master Log G 2. Controller A Controller B 1. AUX # Input Description 1. - 4. Aux #1 - 4 Input 2. AUX # Input Level 2. Info 3. Alert 1. Environmental Alarms 4. Minor 5. Major 6. Critical 7. ACO 5. - 6. PWR Bus A/B Input 1. PWR A/B FAIL Level 2. Info 3. User-Definable Alarms 3. Alert 4. Minor 5. Major 6. Critical 1. Disabled 2. Stand-by Controller Removed Level 2. Info 3. Alert 4. Minor 5. Major 6. Critical 1. Ascending 4. Alarm Chronology 2. Descending 1. Y-Modem 1. TFTP Server 2. TFTP 2. Remote Filename 3. Initiate Transfer 3. Reset Active Controller 1. Disabled 1. Disabled
Controller A H Controller B
Figure 6-30. System Alarms and Firmware Upgrade Menu Trees - DS3 Mode
6-46
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 6, User Interface - Menu Descriptions
MENU DESCRIPTIONS
This section describes in detail the individual menus and screens of the MX3112 system.
MX3112 Main Menu

The MX3112 Main Menu (see Figure 6-31) is the access point to all other operations. Each Main Menu item has several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Configuration Provisioning Quick Setup Status Test Performance Monitoring System Alarms Remote Management
9 - Firmware Upgrade 10 - Logout
Selection :
Figure 6-31. MX3112 Main Menu The MX3112 Main Menu options are shown in Table 6-2. Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 5 Description Configuration Provisioning Quick Setup Status Test Function This option displays the Configuration Screen on page 6-49. This option displays the Provisioning Menu on page 6-51. This option displays the Quick Setup Menu on page 6-117. This option displays the Status Menu on page 6122. This option displays the Test Menu on page 6-138.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-47
Table 6-2. MX3112 Main Menu Options (Continued)

Option 6 7 8 Description Performance Monitoring System Alarms Remote Management Function This option displays the Performance Monitoring Menu on page 6-151. This option displays the System Alarms Menu on page 6-199. This option displays the Remote Management Menu on page 6-208. This option appears only when the Application Mode is set to COT. 8 or 9 Firmware Upgrade This option displays the Firmware Upgrade Menu on page 6-209. This option appears as option 8 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 9 if COT is selected in the Application Mode. 9 or 10 Logout This option displays Logout on page 6-213. This option appears as option 9 if RT is selected in the Application Mode and as option 10 if COT is selected in the Application Mode.
6-48
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Configuration Screen The Configuration screen (see Figure 6-32) displays information about the MX3112 system. Information such as Code Version will change as upgrades are performed. The CLEI Code and Part Number can be used to search for related information on the ADTRAN web site or to order additional parts. Some information from the Configuration screen may be required when calling the ADTRAN Technical Support.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Configuration Controller A CLEI Code Part Number Serial Number MAC Address
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: : : :
M3CU100BTA 1189901L1 1234567890 00:00:00:00:00:00
Product Revision Code Version Code Checksum Boot Version Boot Checksum
: : : : :
A01 05F52B24 A01 02728600
Controller B CLEI Code Part Number Serial Number MAC Address
: : : :
M3CU100BTA 1189901L1 1234567890 00:00:00:00:00:00
Product Revision Code Version Code Checksum Boot Version Boot Checksum
: : : : :
A01 05F52B24 A01 02728600
Figure 6-32. Configuration Screen The Configuration screen fields for Controller A and Controller B are shown in Table 6-3. Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields
Field CLEI Code Part Number Serial Number MAC Address Product Revision Code Version Code Checksum Description This field displays the Common Language Equipment Identifier (CLEI) code of the MX3112 controller card. This field displays the part number of the MX3112 controller card. This field displays the serial number of the MX3112 controller card. This field displays the factory programmed Media Access Control (MAC) or physical layer address for the MX3112 controller card. This field displays the hardware product assembly revision of the MX3112. This field displays the current application firmware revision level of the MX3112. This field displays the checksum of the current application firmware revision level of the MX3112.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-49
Table 6-3. Configuration Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Boot Version Boot Checksum Description This field displays the boot firmware revision code. This field displays the checksum of the boot firmware revision code.
6-50
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Provisioning Menu The Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-33 for copper mode and Figure 6-34 for DS3 mode) is used to make provisioning changes to various options.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Provisioning 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Application Mode DS1 Port Interfaces DS1 Bonding Bonding Groups Packet Flows Ethernet Client Ports Traffic Classes Equipment Protection General Local Network Management Save Provisioning Auto Save
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: Copper, RT, Auto Prov Enabled
: Enabled
13 - Security Administration 14 - Change ADMIN's Password Selection : '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-33. Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode)
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Provisioning 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Application Mode DS3 Interface DS1 Port Interfaces DS1 Bonding Bonding Groups Packet Flows Ethernet Client Ports Traffic Classes Equipment Protection General Local Network Management Save Provisioning Auto Save
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: DS3, RT, Auto Prov Enabled
: Enabled
14 - Security Administration 15 - Change ADMIN's Password Selection : '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-34. Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode) The Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-4.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-51
Table 6-4. Provisioning Menu Options

Option
Copper DS3
Description Application Mode DS3 Interface DS1 Port Interfaces DS1 Bonding Bonding Groups Packet Flows Ethernet Client Ports Traffic Classes Equipment Protection General Network Management Save Provisioning Auto Save Security Administration Change Current ADMINs Password
Function This option displays the Application Mode Menu on page 6-53. This option displays the DS3 Interface Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-55. This option displays the DS1 Port Interfaces Menu on page 6-59. This option displays the DS1 Bonding on page 666. This option displays the Bonding Groups Menu on page 6-79. This option displays the Packet Flows Menu on page 6-83. This option displays the Ethernet Client Ports Menu on page 6-90. This option displays the Traffic Classes Menu on page 6-93. This option displays the Equipment Protection Menu on page 6-96. This option displays the General Provisioning Menu on page 6-97. This option displays the Network Management Menu on page 6-99. This option saves the current network settings. This option displays the Auto Save Menu on page 6-110. This option displays the Security Administration Menu on page 6-111. This option allows the current user to change their password.
1 N/A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6-52
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Application Mode Menu The Application Mode menu (see Figure 6-35) is used to select the terminal mode, application mode, and auto provisioning state.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Application Mode 1 - COT/RT 2 - Copper/DS3 3 - Auto Provisioning : RT : Copper : Enabled
Selection :
Figure 6-35. Application Mode Menu The Application Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-5. Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options
Option 1 Description COT/RT Function This option determines whether the MX3112 controller operates as the master (COT) or as the slave (RT). Options are as follows: COT RT. This option is the default setting and is typically used when the MX3112 system is connected to the OPTI-6100 GEFM. When this option is set to COT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Local. When this option is set to RT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Loop. These timing options can be changed independently if needed. When operating in COT mode, the unit will periodically transmit certain provisioning information toward the RT device via the bonded DS1s. This information includes the bonding group assignments for each DS1.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-53
Table 6-5. Application Mode Menu Options (Continued)

Option 2 Description Copper/DS3 Function This parameter determines whether the network interface on the MX3112 system is configured for copper mode (twelve DS1s) or for DS3 mode (channelized DS3). Options are as follows: Copper DS3 Reference the Application Guidelines on page 3-1 for a detailed explanation of this option. 3 Auto Provisioning This option, which is only available when the system is provisioned for RT mode, is used to select the auto provisioning state. Options are as follows: Disabled. This option disables auto provisioning. When disabled, the unit will not respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The bonding group assignments must be performed manually. Enabled. This option enables auto provisioning. When enabled, the unit will respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The automatic provisioning will override any manual bonding group assignments performed at the RT. The System ID of the RT is sent to the COT. This parameter is typically programmed into the MX3112 system when it is installed and will allow a user friendly ID to be displayed on the Remote Management menu of the COT. This option is not displayed when the COT/RT option is set to COT.
6-54
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS3 Interface Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS3 Interface menu (see Figure 6-36) provides options to provision the Tx framing, Tx clock source, loopback detection, DS3 circuit identifier, and DS3 equipment identification.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS3 Interface
1 2 3 4 5
Tx Framing Tx Clock Source Loopback Detection DS3 Circuit Identifier DS3 Equipment Identification
: : : :
M23 Local Enabled DS3 A
Selection :
Figure 6-36. DS3 Interface Menu The DS3 Interface menu options are shown in Table 6-6. Table 6-6. DS3 Interface Menu Options
Option 1 Description Tx Framing Function This option is used to provision the framing. Options are as follows: C-bit M23 (also called M13) 2 Tx Clock Source This option is used to provision the timing. Options are as follows: Loop. When this option is selected, timing is received from the DS3 network. Local. When this option is selected, timing is 44.736 Mbps 20 ppm (ANSI T1.102-1993).
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-55
Table 6-6. DS3 Interface Menu Options (Continued)

Option 3 Description Loopback Detection Function This option is used to disable or enable the FEAC and C-bit loopbacks. Options are as follows: Disabled. When this option is selected, the MX3112 system ignores all out of band loopback requests (FEAC and DS2-Level C-bit). The MX3112 system responds to individual T1 in-band CSU/NIU loopbacks if the system is configured with the T1 loopback menu. Enabled. When this option is selected, the MX3112 system responds to remote loopback requests received over the DS3 far end alarm and control (FEAC) channel and/or the DS2level C-bits. This mode is valid for both C-bit and M23 framing formats. 4 DS3 Circuit Identifier This option is used to enter a DS3 circuit identifier. This field accepts up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This option displays the Equipment Identification Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-57.
DS3 Equipment Identification
6-56
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Equipment Identification Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The Equipment Identification menu (see Figure 6-37) is used to enter ID codes for the near and far end facilities, locations, frames, units, and equipment. These fields provide userconfigurable text strings to identify the MX3112 system over the network.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS3 Interface->Equipment Identification
1 2 3 4 5
Near Near Near Near Near Far Far Far Far Far
End End End End End
Facility ID Code Location ID Code Frame ID Code Unit Code Equipment Code
: : : : : : : : : :
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
End End End End End
Facility ID Code Location ID Code Frame ID Code Unit Code Equipment Code
Selection :
Figure 6-37. Equipment Identification Menu The Equipment Identification menu options are shown in Table 6-7. Table 6-7. Equipment Identification Menu Options
Option 1 Description Near End Facility ID Code Function This option is used to enter a near end facility ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 38 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This option is used to enter a near end location ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 11 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.
Near End Location ID Code
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-57
Table 6-7. Equipment Identification Menu Options (Continued)

Option 3 Description Near End Frame ID Code Function This option is used to enter a near end frame ID code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 10 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This option is used to enter a near end unit code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is an user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 6 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This option is used to enter a near end equipment code that is transmitted in the DS3 overhead to the next device. The code is a user-configurable text string. This field accepts up to 10 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This field displays the facility ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3. This field displays the location ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3. This field displays the frame ID code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3. This field displays the unit code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3. This field displays the equipment code that is received in the DS3 overhead from the device at the far end of the DS3.
Near End Unit Code
Near End Equipment Code
Far End Facility ID Code
Far End Location ID Code
Far End Frame ID Code
Far End Unit Code
Far End Equipment Code
6-58
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Port Interfaces Menu The DS1 Port Interfaces menu (see Figure 6-38 for copper mode and Figure 6-39) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each DS1 port.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Line Length(ft) 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port
Circuit ID #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 **Copper mode. All DS1s use B8ZS coding.** '?' - System Help Screen
13 - Copy Provisioning to Multiple Selection :
Figure 6-38. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (Copper Mode)
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Line Length(ft) 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133 Line Coding B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS Loopback Detect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1
Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port
Circuit ID #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12
13 - Copy Provisioning to Multiple Selection : '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-39. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu (DS3 Mode) The DS1 Port Interfaces menu options are shown in Table 6-8.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-59
Table 6-8. DS1 Port Interfaces Menu Options

Option 1 - 12 13 Description DS1 Port # Copy Provisioning to Multiple Function This option displays the DS1 Port Provisioning Menu on page 6-61. This option displays the Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu on page 6-64.
6-60
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Port Provisioning Menu The DS1 Port Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-40 for copper mode and Figure 6-41 for DS3 mode) is used to set the state, line length, and circuit identifier for each individual DS1 port. In DS3 mode, this menu is used to also provision the line coding and loopback detection. NOTE In copper mode, all DS1s use B8ZS coding.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Port #1
1 - State 2 - Line Length (feet) 3 - Circuit Identifier
: Enabled : 0-133 : DS1 Port #1
Selection :
Figure 6-40. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (Copper Mode)
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-61
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Port #1
1 2 3 4 5
State Line Length (feet) Line Coding Loopback Detection Circuit Identifier
: : : : :
Enabled 0-133 B8ZS Disabled DS1 Port #1
Selection :
Figure 6-41. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode) The DS1 Port Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-9. Table 6-9. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields
Option
Copper DS3
Field State
Description This option is used to set the state. Options are as follows: Disabled. The DS1 transmit drivers are tristated, and no alarms associated with this port are reported. Enabled. The DS1 drivers are enabled and alarms are not suppressed.
Line Length (feet)
This option is used to set the line length (line build out) for each port interface according to the distance from the MX3112 system to the DTE device. Options are as follows: 0-133 133-266 266-399 399-533 533-655
N/A
Line Coding
This option is used to select the line coding state. Options are as follows: AMI B8ZS
6-62
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-9. DS1 Port Provisioning Menu Fields (Continued)

Option
Copper DS3
Field Loopback Detection
Description This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows: Disabled CSU NIU
N/A
Circuit Identifier
This option is used to enter a circuit identifier. The circuit ID is a user-configurable text string field used to name the individual ports. This field accepts up to 32 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-63
Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu The Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports menu (see Figure 6-42 for copper mode and Figure 6-43 for DS3 mode) is used to copy DS1 port settings to multiple DS1 ports at once.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports 1 - Copy FROM DS1 Port State Line Length (feet) Loopback Detection : 1 : Enabled : 0-133 : Disabled
2 - First DS1 Port to Copy TO 3 - Last DS1 Port to Copy TO 4 - Copy Provisioning
: 2 : 12
Selection :
Figure 6-42. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (Copper Mode)
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Ports->Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports 1 - Copy FROM DS1 Port State Line Length (feet) Line Coding Loopback Detection : 1 : : : : Enabled 0-133 B8ZS Disabled
2 - First DS1 Port to Copy TO 3 - Last DS1 Port to Copy TO 4 - Copy Provisioning
: 2 : 12
Selection :
Figure 6-43. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu (DS3 Mode) The Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports menu options are shown in Table 6-10.
6-64
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-10. Copy Provisioning to Multiple DS1 Ports Menu Options

Option 1 Description Copy FROM DS1 Port State Line Length (feet) Line Coding (DS3 Mode Only) Loopback Detection 2 3 4 First DS1 Port to Copy TO Last DS1 Port to Copy TO Copy Provisioning Function This option is used to enter the DS1 Port # from which the settings will be copied. This field displays the state setting that is to be copied. This field displays the line length setting that is to be copied. This field displays the line coding setting that is to be copied. This field displays the loopback detection setting that is to be copied. This option is used to enter the first DS1 Port # to which the settings will be copied to. This option is used to enter the last DS1 Port # to which the settings will be copied to. This option copies the settings to the selected DS1 ports.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-65
DS1 Bonding The DS1 Bonding menu (see Figure 6-44 for copper mode and Figure 6-45 for DS3 mode) is used to view the current settings and access the bonding group, loopback, and state options for each DS1 port in copper mode and each DS3 tributary in DS3 mode.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Bonding Group Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Lpbk Detect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled State IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
These DS1s always use ESF framing. Auto Provisioning Enabled. Bonding Group Assignment controlled by COT.
13 - DS1 Timing : Loop 14 - Link Identifiers Selection : '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-44. DS1 Bonding Menu (Copper Mode)
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Bonding Group Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Lpbk Detect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled State IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
These DS1s always use ESF framing. Auto Provisioning Enabled. Bonding Group Assignment controlled by COT.
13 - DS1 Timing : Loop 14 - Link Identifiers Selection : '?' - System Help Scree
Figure 6-45. DS1 Bonding Menu (DS3 Mode) The DS1 Bonding menu options are shown in Table 6-11.
6-66
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-11. DS1 Bonding Menu Options

Option
Copper DS3
Description DS1 Port 1 - 12 DS3 Tributary 13 - 24
Function This option displays the DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu (Copper Mode Only) on page 6-68. This option displays the DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 670. This option displays the DS1 Timing Mode Menu on page 6-75. This option displays the Link Identifiers Menu on page 6-76.
1-12 N/A
N/A 1-12
13 14
13 14
DS1 Timing Link Identifiers
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-67
DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu (Copper Mode Only) The DS1 Port #1 - #12 menu (see Figure 6-50) is used to provision the DS1 bonding group, loopback detection, and state for each individual DS1 port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Port #1
1 - Bonding Group 2 - Loopback Detect 3 - State
: Disabled : Disabled : IS
Selection :
Figure 6-46. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu The DS1 Port #1 - #12 menu options are shown in Table 6-12. Table 6-12. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu Options
Option 1 Description Bonding Group Function This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS1 port. Enter 1 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 1. Enter 2 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 2. Enter 3 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 3. Enter 4 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 4. Enter 0 to remove a DS1 from its assigned bonding group. The bonding group is automatically configured by the COT when auto provisioning is enabled.
6-68
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-12. DS1 Port #1 - #12 Menu Options (Continued)

Option 2 Description Loopback Detect Function This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows: Disabled CSU NIU FDL CSU + FDL NIU + FDL 3. State This option is used select the service state of the bonded DS1. When the bonded DS1 is set to out of service (OOS), it is possible to suppress the alarms on that channel. A DS1 would typically be set to out of service during testing. Options are as follows: IS OOS
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-69
DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS3 Tributary Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-47) is used to provision the bonding group, loopback detection, and state for each individual DS3 tributary.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS3 Trib #13
1 - Bonding Group 2 - Loopback Detect 3 - State
: Disabled : Disabled : IS
Selection :
Figure 6-47. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu The DS3 Tributary Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-13. Table 6-13. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options
Option 1 Description Bonding Group Function This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS3 tributary. Enter 1 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 1. Enter 2 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 2. Enter 3 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 3. Enter 4 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 4. Enter 0 to remove a DS3 tributary from the bonding group it is assigned to. The bonding group is automatically configured by the COT when auto provisioning is enabled.
6-70
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-13. DS3 Tributary Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)

Option 2 Description Loopback Detect Function This option is used to select the loopback detect state. Options are as follows: Disabled CSU NIU FDL CSU + FDL NIU + FDL 3 State This option is used select the service state of the DS3 tributary. When the tributary is set to out of service (OOS), it is possible to suppress the alarms on that channel. A tributary would typically be set to out of service during testing. Options are as follows: IS OOS
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-71
DS1 Timing Menu The DS1 Timing menu is used to provision the timing for the DS1s. When local or loop is selected as the DS1 timing mode, the DS1 Timing menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-48. When line is selected as the DS1 timing mode, the DS1 Timing menu is displayed as shown in Figure 6-49.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Timing 1 - DS1 Timing Mode : Loop
Selection :
Figure 6-48. DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Local or Loop) The DS1 Timing menu options are shown in Table 6-14. Table 6-14. DS1 Timing Menu Options
Option 1 Description DS1 Timing Mode Function This option displays the DS1 Timing Mode Menu on page 6-75.
6-72
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->DS1 Timing 1 - DS1 Timing Mode Functional Reference Primary Reference Status Secondary Reference Status 2 - Primary Reference 3 - Secondary Reference 4 - Line Timing Failure Mode 5 - Reference Restoration 6 - Switch Pri/Sec References : Line : Fail : Fail : Fail : DS1 Port #1 : DS1 Port #1 : Loop : Nonrevertive
Selection :
Figure 6-49. DS1 Timing Menu (DS1 Timing Mode = Line) The DS1 Timing menu options are shown in Table 6-15. Table 6-15. DS1 Timing Menu Options
Option 1 Description DS1 Timing Mode Functional Reference Primary Reference Status Secondary Reference Status 2 Primary Reference Function This option displays the DS1 Timing Mode Menu on page 6-75. This field displays the status of the functional reference. This field displays the functional status of the primary reference. This field displays the functional status of the secondary reference. This option is used to select the primary reference. The options are one of the bonding DS1s. If the primary reference fails, the secondary reference will become the active timing reference. This option is used to select the secondary reference. The options are one of the bonding DS1s.
Secondary Reference
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-73
Table 6-15. DS1 Timing Menu Options (Continued)

Option 4 Description Line Timing Failure Mode Function This option is used to set the timing mode if both the primary and secondary reference fail. Options are as follows: Loop Local 5 Reference Restoration This option is used to provision the active timing reference. Options are as follows: Revertive. If provisioned as revertive, then the active timing reference will revert to the primary reference if its status is okay. Nonrevertive. If provisioned as non-revertive, then the system will not automatically revert to the primary reference. 6 Switch Pri/Sec References This option is used to swap the provisioned primary and secondary references.
6-74
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Timing Mode Menu The DS1 Timing Mode menu (see Figure 6-50) is used to control the transmit timing mode for the bonded DS1s.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
DS1 Timing Mode : Loop 1 - Loop 2 - Line 3 - Local
Selection :
Figure 6-50. DS1 Timing Mode Menu The DS1 Timing Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-16. Table 6-16. DS1 Timing Mode Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 Description Loop Line Local Function The transmit timing for each bonded DS1 is derived from its respective received clock. The transmit timing for all bonded DS1s is derived from a common onboard timing source. The transmit timing for all bonded DS1s is derived from the received clock of a user-designated DS1.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-75
Link Identifiers Menu The Link Identifiers menu is shown in Figure 6-51 for copper mode and Figure 6-52 for DS3 mode. A link ID is analogous to a path trace string for bonded DS1s. The value is an ASCII text string that can be provisioned to be unique among other link ID values. Each direction of a bonded DS1 can be provisioned with a unique identification string for the purposes of verifying that the DS1s are properly connected. Actions can be taken if the received link ID is not equal to the expected link ID value for a given DS1.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Sent Link ID Received Link ID Expected Link ID
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 - Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs 14 - Mismatch Action : No Action Selection : '?' - System Help Scree
Figure 6-51. Link Identifiers Menu (Copper Mode)
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Sent Link ID Received Link ID Expected Link ID
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 - Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs 14 - Mismatch Action : No Action Selection : '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-52. Link Identifiers Menu (DS3 Mode)
6-76
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
The Link Identifiers menu options are shown in Table 6-17. Table 6-17. Link Identifiers Menu Options
Option
Copper DS3
Description DS1 Port 1 - 12 DS1 Trib 1 - 12 Set ALL Expected Link IDs equal to Received Link IDs Mismatch Action
Function This option displays the Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu on page 6-78. This option displays the Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu on page 6-78. This option is used to set all expected link IDs to the received link IDs. This option is used to select the action to be taken in the event that the received link ID does not equal the expected value. Options are as follows: No Action. No action is taken. Alarm Only. Issues an alarm for the DS1 that indicates a link mismatch condition. Alarm + Link Drop. Issues an alarm for the DS1 that indicates a link mismatch condition. Removes the DS1 from the provisioned bonding group and reinstates the DS1 if the mismatch condition is cleared.
1-12 N/A 13 14
N/A 1-12 13 14
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-77
Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu The Link Identifiers DS1 Port menu is shown in Figure 6-53.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->DS1 Bonding->Link Identifiers->DS1 Port #1
1 - Sent Link ID : Received Link ID : 2 - Expected Link ID : 3 - Set Expected Equal to Received
Selection :
Figure 6-53. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu The Link Identifiers DS1 Port menu options are shown in Table 6-18. Table 6-18. Link Identifiers DS1 Port Menu Options
Option 1 Description Sent Link ID Function This option is used to enter a sent link identifier. The sent link ID is a user-configurable text string field. This field accepts up to 20 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This field displays the received link ID. This option is used to enter a expected link identifier. The expected link ID is a user-configurable text string field. This field accepts up to 20 alphanumeric characters, including spaces and special characters. This option is used to set the expected link ID to the same text string as the received link ID.
Received Link ID 2 Expected Link ID
Set Expected Equal to Received
6-78
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Bonding Groups Menu The Bonding Groups menu (see Figure 6-54 for RT mode and Figure 6-55 for COT mode) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each bonding group.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups Bonding 1 2 3 4 Group Skew Threshold (ms) 4 4 4 4 XCV Threshold 1e-5 1e-5 1e-5 1e-5
Selection :
Figure 6-54. Bonding Groups Menu (RT Mode)
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups Remote Auto-Provisioned Bonding Group 1 2 3 4
Bonding 1 2 3 4
Group -
Skew Threshold (ms) 4 4 4 4
XCV Threshold Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Selection :
Figure 6-55. Bonding Groups Menu (COT Mode) The Bonding Groups menu options are shown in Table 6-19.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-79
Table 6-19. Bonding Groups Menu Options

Option 1-4 Description Bonding Group 1 - 4 Function This option displays the Bonding Group Provisioning Menu on page 6-81.
6-80
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Bonding Group Provisioning Menu The Bonding Group Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-56) is used to provision the skew threshold and XCV threshold for each bonding group.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE 01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
ID:
MX3112->Provisioning->Bonding Groups->Bonding Group #1
1 - Skew Threshold (ms) : 4 2 - XCV Threshold : Disabled 3 - Remote Auto-Provisioned Group : 1
Selection :
Figure 6-56. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu The Bonding Group Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-20. Table 6-20. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options
Option 1 Description Skew Threshold Function This option is used to enter the maximum allowable skew threshold, in milliseconds, for each bonding group. Enter 0 to disable this option. Skew thresholds from 1 millisecond to 16 milliseconds (in 1 millisecond intervals) are available. The default skew threshold is 4 milliseconds. A DS1 will automatically be removed from a bonding group if the relative skew exceeds the specified threshold. The DS1 will automatically be added back to the group once the relative skew is below the threshold (plus 0.50 millisecond of hysteresis).
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-81
Table 6-20. Bonding Group Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)

Option 2 Description XCV Threshold Function This option is used to select the XCV threshold. Options are as follows: Disabled 1e-8 1e-7 1e-6 1e-5 1e-4 1e-3
A DS1 will automatically be removed from a bonding group if its XCV exceeds the specified threshold. The DS1 will automatically be added back to the group once the XCV is below the threshold. 3 Remote Auto-Provisioned Group This option sets the bonding group number of the RT system. For example, bonded DS1s 4-6 of the COT could be designated for both bonding group #2 of the COT and bonding group #3 of the RT. This option only appears when COT is selected in the Application Mode.
6-82
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Packet Flows Menu The Packet Flows menu is shown in Figure 6-57. Refer to Data Path Provisioning on page 55 for a more complete explanation of flows.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows Page 1 of 1 Src Dest Port/ Src Committed Burst CoS Port/ Tag New New Flow Group VID Rate (kbps) Rate (kbps) Class Group Manip VID Prio 1 P1 0 No Limit 3 G1 Push 101 Inh(7) 2 P2 0 No Limit 3 G2 Push 102 Inh(7) 3 P3 0 No Limit 3 G3 Push 103 Inh(7) 4 P4 0 No Limit 3 G4 Push 104 Inh(7) 5 G1 101 0 No Limit 3 P1 Pop 6 G2 102 0 No Limit 3 P2 Pop 7 G3 103 0 No Limit 3 P3 Pop 8 G4 104 0 No Limit 3 P4 Pop ----------------------------->> END OF FLOW LIST <<----------------------------
Legend: G = Group
P = Port
Figure 6-57. Packet Flows Menu The Packet Flows menu option is shown in Table 6-21. Table 6-21. Packet Flows Menu Option
Option 1-8 Description Packet Flow # Function This option displays the Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu on page 6-85. Note: Up to 100 flows can be provisioned. 9 Add New Flow This option displays the Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu on page 6-85. Note: The option number increases or decreases by one as each flow is added or deleted.
The Packet Flows hot keys are shown in Table 6-22. Table 6-22. Packet Flows Hot Keys
Option
N P
Description Next Previous
Function This hot key is used to display the next screen. This hot key is used to display the previous screen.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-83
Table 6-22. Packet Flows Hot Keys (Continued)

Option
F L S Q
Description First Last Sort Quick-Set
Function This hot key is used to display the first page of flows. This hot key is used to display the last page of flows. This hot key displays the Sort By Menu on page 688. This hot key displays the Quick-Set Menu on page 6-89.
6-84
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu The Packet Flows Add/Edit menu is shown in Figure 6-58. NOTE After making changes to the flow in the Packet Flows Add/Edit menu, the Commit Flow option must be selected for the changes to be applied.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows->Edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Source Port/Group Source VID Committed Rate (kbps) Burst Rate (kbps) Class Of Service Dest Port/Group Tag Manipulation New VID Priority Inheritance Default Priority : : : : : : : : : : Port 1 Not Specified 0 No Limit 3 Group 1 Push 101 Enabled 7
11 - Commit Flow 12 - Delete Flow
Selection:
Figure 6-58. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu The Packet Flows Add/Edit menu option is shown in Table 6-23. Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option
Option 1 Description Source Port/Group Function This option is used to select the source port or group. Options are as follows Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-85
Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option (Continued)

Option 2 3 Description Source VID Committed Rate (kbps) Function This option is used to enter the source VLAN ID. This option is used to enter the bit rate that the MX3112 system will always attempt to reserve for this flow in the destination bonding group. This option is used to enter the maximum allowed average bit rate for this flow. This option is used to select the CoS class that all packets that match the flow will be explicitly classified to. Options are as follows: 1 2 3 6 Dest Port/Group This option is used to select the destination port or group that all packets in the flow will exit on. Options are as follows Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 7 Tag Manipulation This option is used to select the tag manipulation that will be performed on the packets in the flow. Options are as follows: None Push Pop Swap 8 New VID This option is used to enter the new VLAN ID. This option appears only when push or swap is selected on the Tag Manipulation menu. This option is used to instruct the system on whether or not to inherit the priority value from the existing VLAN tag. Options are as follows: Disabled Enabled This option appears only when push or swap is selected on the Tag Manipulation menu.
4 5
Burst Rate (kbps) Class of Service
Priority Inheritance
6-86
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-23. Packet Flows Add/Edit Menu Option (Continued)

Option 10 Description Default Priority Function This option is used to enter a new priority. This option appears only when push or swap is selected on the Tag Manipulation menu. This option is used to accept the changes made to the flow and to put the changes into effect. This option is used to delete the selected flow. This option appears only when editing a flow.
11 12
Commit Flow Delete Flow
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-87
Sort By Menu The Sort By menu (see Figure 6-59) is used to sort the list of flows on the Packet Flows menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows->Sort By Current Method = Source Port/Group and Source VID 1 - Source Port/Group and Source VID 2 - Destination Port/Group
Selection:
Figure 6-59. Sort By Menu The Sort By menu option is shown in Table 6-24. Table 6-24. Sort By Menu Option
Option 1 Description Source Port/Group and Source VID Function This option is used to sort the list of flows on the Packet Flows menu by the source port/group and source VID. This option is used to sort the list of flows on the Packet Flows menu by the destination port/group.
Destination Port/Group
6-88
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Quick-Set Menu The Quick-Set menu (see Figure 6-60) is used to establish a generic set of flows or delete all flows. CAUTION This operation will replace any existing flows and will disrupt the flow of data.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Packet Flows->Quick-Set 1 - One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default VIDs 2 - Delete All Flows
Warning!!! This operation will replace any existing flows and will disrupt the flow of data.
Selection:
Figure 6-60. Quick-Set Menu The Quick-Set menu option is shown in Table 6-25. Table 6-25. Quick-Set Menu Option
Option 1 Description One-to-One Port/Group Mapping with Default VIDs Delete All Flows Function This option is used to automatically establish a potentially common set of flows as shown in Figure 6-57 on page 6-83. This option is used to delete all flows.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-89
Ethernet Client Ports Menu The Ethernet Client Ports menu (see Figure 6-61) is used to view the current settings and access the provisioning options for each Ethernet client port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Ethernet Client Ports
Port 1 2 3 4 -
State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
Rate & Duplex Auto(Unknown) Auto(Unknown) Auto(Unknown) Auto(Unknown)
Crossover Link Mode Status Auto Down Auto Down Auto Down Auto Down
Link State Follows Group State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Selection :
Figure 6-61. Ethernet Client Ports Menu The Ethernet Client Ports menu options are shown in Table 6-26. Table 6-26. Ethernet Client Port Menu Options
Option 1-4 Description Ethernet Client Port 1 - 4 Function This option displays the Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu on page 6-91.
6-90
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu The Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-62) is used to provision the Ethernet state, the provisioned rate and duplex, the cross-over mode, and the link state follows group state for each Ethernet client port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Ethernet Client Ports->Port #1
1 - Ethernet State 2 - Provisioned Rate & Duplex Functional Rate & Duplex 3 - Cross-Over Mode 4 - Link State Follows Group State Link Status
: : : : :
Enabled Auto Unknown Auto Disabled
: Down
Selection :
Figure 6-62. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu The Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-27. Table 6-27. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options
Option 1 Description Ethernet State Function This option is used to select the Ethernet state. Options are as follows: Disabled. This option disables the client Ethernet port. Link status alarms will be suppressed and the Ethernet link for the port is forced down. Enabled. This option enables the client Ethernet port. 2 Provisioned Rate & Duplex This option is used to select the rate and duplex. Options are as follows: Auto. This option allows auto negotiation of the Ethernet rate and duplex. 10, Half 10, Full 100, Half 100, Full
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-91
Table 6-27. Ethernet Client Ports Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description Functional Rate & Duplex 3 Cross-Over Mode Function This field displays the actual data rate of the Ethernet client port. This option is used to select the cross-over mode for the selected Ethernet client port. Options are as follows: MDI MDI-X Auto 4 Link State Follows Group State This option is used select the mode that governs the Ethernet state. Options are as follows Disabled. The state of the Ethernet port is governed by the Ethernet state option. Enabled. The state of the Ethernet port is governed by the Ethernet state option in combination with the status of any associated bonding groups according to the provisioned flows. If the Ethernet state option is enabled, but the bonding groups associated with this port are down (or if there are no associated bonding groups), then the port will behave as though it is disabled (Ethernet link is forced down). Link Status This read-only field displays the Ethernet client port status as being either Up or Down. The front panel Ethernet link LED also displays this status.
6-92
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Traffic Classes Menu The Traffic Classes menu (see Figure 6-63 and Figure 6-64) is used to set the queue depth for each traffic class or each P-Bit priority and to set the classification mode. Prioritization of traffic is especially important in cases such as when the rate of received traffic that is destined for a bonding group is greater than the available bandwidth of that bonding group. It is often preferable for the system to make deterministic, intelligent decisions about which packets will be dropped and which will be forwarded. Consider a scenario where all of the traffic received from Ethernet ports 1 and 2 is to be forwarded to bonding group 1. An important question to consider is which packets are more likely to be discarded if the available bandwidth of bonding group 1 is not enough to carry the combined traffic received on both Ethernet ports. Should one flow always have priority over the other flow, or should prioritization perhaps be done on a per-packet basis according to the P-bits of any pre-existing VLAN tags? For some customer applications, it is preferable for a packet to be discarded during congestion periods rather than for the packet to persist but with excessive latency. For other applications, higher latency is preferable to packets being discarded. The MX3112 supports provisionable egress queue depths that allow the system to be further tuned to handle one preference or the other. The bonding engine within the MX3112 can be viewed to have multiple egress queues for each bonding group (one queue for each class of service), where the higher priority queues are emptied before the lower priority queues. When the Classification Mode is Explicit, there are effectively three egress queues: one queue for each of the three explicit class of service (1, 2, or 3) as shown in Figure 6-63 on page 6-94. When the Classification Mode is P-bit, there are effectively eight egress queues: on queue for each of the eight classes of service that can be derived from the VLAN tag P-bit field. Figure 664 on page 6-95 shows the Traffic Class menu when the Classification Mode is set to P-bit. The provisionable queue depth values offer a trade-off between the systems potential latency of bursted packets and the ability to process bursted packets without them being discarded. Higher queue depths allow the system to process larger bursts, but can result in a higher latency of packets due to the greater time required to empty a full egress queue. Smaller queue depths can result in lower latency of bursted packets, but with a higher probability of discarding burst packets. CAUTION Changing the classification mode is traffic-affecting.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-93
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Traffic Classes Traffic Class 1 2 3 Queue Depth (packets) 50 50 50
1 2 3 -
4 - Classification Mode : Explicit
Selection :
Figure 6-63. Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to Explicit For explicit classification mode, the Traffic Classes menu options are shown in Table 6-28. Table 6-28. Traffic Classes Menu Options
Option 1-3 4 Description Traffic Class 1 - 3 Classification Mode Function This option is used to enter the queue depth. This option is used to set the classification mode. Options are as follows: Explicit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as Explicit, each flow can be explicitly provisioned to have a certain relative priority. A Class of Service (CoS) field becomes visible for each flow. The CoS value sets the priority of the flow relative to the priority of other flows that are forwarded to the same port or group. The CoS value for a given flow can be explicitly set as 1, 2, or 3, where 1 is the highest priority. P-bit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as P-bit, the Class of Service value for each flow does not apply and is not visible. The priority of each packet is inherited from the P-bit field of the top pre-existing VLAN tag, if it exists, as it is received. This P-bit field within the VLAN tag is three bits wide, allowing for up to eight classes of service (0 = highest priority, 7 = lowest priority).
6-94
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Traffic Classes P-bit Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue Depth (packets) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 - Classification Mode : P-Bit
Selection :
Figure 6-64. Traffic Classes Menu with Classification Mode set to P-Bit For P-Bit classification mode, the Traffic Classes menu options are shown in Table 6-29. Table 6-29. Traffic Classes Menu Options
Option 1-8 9 Description P-Bit Priority 0-7 Classification Mode Function This option is used to enter the queue depth. This option is used to set the classification mode. Options are as follows: Explicit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as Explicit, each flow can be explicitly provisioned to have a certain relative priority. A Class of Service (CoS) field becomes visible for each flow. The CoS value sets the priority of the flow relative to the priority of other flows that are forwarded to the same port or group. The CoS value for a given flow can be explicitly set as 1, 2, or 3, where 1 is the highest priority. P-bit. When the Classification Mode is provisioned as P-bit, the Class of Service value for each flow does not apply and is not visible. The priority of each packet is inherited from the P-bit field of the top pre-existing VLAN tag, if it exists, as it is received. This P-bit field within the VLAN tag is three bits wide, allowing for up to eight classes of service (0 = highest priority, 7 = lowest priority).
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-95
Equipment Protection Menu The Equipment Protection menu (see Figure 6-65) is used to perform a manual switch from the active card to the standby card. CAUTION Performing a manual switch will briefly interrupt customer data.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Equipment Protection
Active (Card A) Standby (Card B)
: Normal : Not Installed
1 - Perform Manual Switch
Selection :
Figure 6-65. Equipment Protection Menu The Equipment Protection menu options are shown in Table 6-30. Table 6-30. Equipment Protection Menu Options
Option 1 Description Perform Manual Switch Function This option is used to perform a manual switch from the active controller card to the standby controller card.
6-96
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
General Provisioning Menu The General Provisioning menu (see Figure 6-66) is used to provision the craft port baud rate, the date, time, auto-logoff inactivity time, to reset the MX3112 system, and to restore default provisioning. CAUTION If the baud rate is changed, the rate changes immediately, and the terminal emulation software must be updated to reflect the change.
CAUTION Resetting this card will disrupt traffic and cause a switch to the standby card if it is installed.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->General
1 - Craft Port Baud Rate Functional Baud Rate 2 - Date 3 - Time 4 - Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time 5 - System ID 6 - Scheduled Card Reset 7 - Card Reset 8 - Restore Default Provisioning
: : : : : :
Auto 115200 01/01/2005 12:00:00 15-Min Site 1 MX3112
: Disabled
Selection :
Figure 6-66. General Provisioning Menu The General Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 6-31.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-97
Table 6-31. General Provisioning Menu Options

Option 1 Description Craft Port Baud Rate Function This option is used to select the craft port baud rate. Options are as follows: Auto. This option allows the craft port baud rate to be set automatically. Disabled. This option disables the local craft port interface. This allows a Telnet session to disable the craft port. 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Functional Baud Rate 2 3 4 Date Time Auto-Logoff Inactivity Time This field displays the actual craft port baud rate. This option is used to enter the date. This option is used to enter the time. This option is used to select the amount of inactivity time before the system will automatically log off. Options are as follows: Disabled 1-Min 5-Min 10-Min 15-Min 30-Min 45-Min 60-Min 5 System ID This option is used to enter a 20-character system identification for the unit. The System ID is a userfriendly identification for the MX3112 system that is automatically displayed on the provisioning screen of the COT/GEFM. This option is used to enter the scheduled card reset date and time. This option is disabled if the scheduled date and time is passed. This option is used to perform a manual card reset. This option is used to restore all provisioning options to the default settings.
Scheduled Card Reset
7 8
Card Reset Restore Default Provisioning
6-98
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Network Management Menu The Network Management menu (see Figure 6-67) is used to provision Ethernet information. CAUTION Changing IP settings will terminate all active Telnet sessions.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management 1 - Management Mode : VLAN 501, Group 1 2 - IP Address 3 - Subnet Mask 4 - Gateway MAC Address 5 - TFTP Server : 10.100.51.95 : 255.255.255.0 : 10.100.51.254 : 02:01:44:09:00:28 : 0.0.0.0
6 - Rear Ethernet Interface 7 - Network Service Ports 8 - SNMP
Selection :
Figure 6-67. Network Management Menu The Network Management menu options are shown in Table 6-32. Table 6-32. Network Management Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description Management Mode IP Address Function This option displays the Management Mode Menu on page 6-101. This option is used to enter the IP Address. The IP Address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-99
Table 6-32. Network Management Menu Options (Continued)

Option 3 Description Subnet Mask Function This option is used to enter the subnet mask. A subnet mask is used to reduce the traffic on each subnetwork by confining traffic to only the subnetwork for which it was intended. A subnet mask makes the entire network more manageable. In effect, each subnet functions as though it were an independent network, keeping local traffic local and forwarding traffic to another subnet only if the address of the data is external to the subnet. The Subnet Mask is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255. This option is used to enter the default gateway/ router between the internal network and the external network. The gateway address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255. This option is used to enter the address for the remote TFTP server that is used to download code. Contact the network administrator for this address. This option displays the Rear Ethernet Interface Menu on page 6-103. This option displays the Network Service Ports Menu on page 6-105. This option displays the SNMP Menu on page 6106.
Gateway
TFTP Server
6 7 8
Rear Ethernet Interface Network Service Ports SNMP
6-100
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Management Mode Menu The Management Mode menu (see Figure 6-68) is used to provision the management mode, VLAN ID, and port/group. For additional details on management modes, refer to Network Management on page 6-3. NOTE The management VID may not equal the source VID or the new VID of any flows.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Management Mode
1 - Management Mode Options for VLAN Management 2 - Management VLAN ID 3 - Management Port/Group
: VLAN
: 501 : Group 1
Selection :
Figure 6-68. Management Mode Menu The Management Mode menu options are shown in Table 6-33. Table 6-33. Management Mode Menu Options
Option 1 Description Management Mode Function This option is used to provision the interface from which the system can be managed via Ethernet. Table 6-34 describes the management modes. When the management mode is set to VLAN, this option is used to provision the VLAN ID designated for managing the system. The possible values are 1 through 4094.
Management VLAN ID
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-101
Table 6-33. Management Mode Menu Options (Continued)

Option 3 Description Management Port/Group Function When the management mode is set to VLAN, this option is used select the client Ethernet port or bonding group designated for carrying Ethernet management traffic for the system. Options are as follows: Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Table 6-34. Management Modes

Option 1 Mode Disabled Function The system cannot be managed via Ethernet. Management connectivity is supported only via craft interface and the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only). The chassis Ethernet port is disabled. Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from the chassis 10/100 Ethernet port. Management connectivity is supported via the craft interface, the dedicated COT-RT menu channel (remote unit only), or via Ethernet from a VLAN on a designated bonding group or a customer 10/100 port. The chassis Ethernet port is disabled.
Local
VLAN
6-102
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Rear Ethernet Interface Menu The Rear Ethernet Interface menu (see Figure 6-69) is used to provision provisioned data rate and cross-over mode for the rear Ethernet interface.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Rear Ethernet Interface
1 - Provisioned Rate & Duplex Functional Rate & Duplex 2 - Cross-Over Mode Link Status
: : : :
Auto Unknown Auto Down
Selection :
Figure 6-69. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu The Rear Ethernet Interface menu options are shown in Table 6-35. Table 6-35. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options
Option 1 Description Provisioned Rate & Duplex Function This option is used to select the data rate and duplex. Options are as follows: Auto. This option allows auto negotiation of the Ethernet line speed and duplex. 10 Mbps Half Duplex 10 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex Functional Rate & Duplex This field displays the actual data rate of the Ethernet port.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-103
Table 6-35. Rear Ethernet Interface Menu Options (Continued)

Option 2 Description Cross-Over Mode Function This option is used to select the cross-over mode for the selected Ethernet client port. Options are as follows: MDI MDI-X Auto Link Status This read-only field displays the status of the network as being either Up or Down.
6-104
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Network Service Ports Menu The Network Service Ports menu (see Figure 6-70) provides the option to enter a secondary port number.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->Network Service Ports
1 - TL1 Telnet Port 2 - TL1 Raw-TCP Port 3 - Secondary Telnet Port
: 2000 : 2001 : 2002
Selection :
Figure 6-70. Network Service Ports Menu The Network Service Ports menu option is shown in Table 6-36. Table 6-36. Network Service Ports Menu Option
Option 1 Description TL1 Telnet Port Function This option is used to enter the TCP port number associated with managing the system via TL1, with normal telnet negotiation operations enabled. The possible values are 1024 through 65535. This option is used to enter the TCP port number associated with managing the system via TL1, with normal telnet negotiation operations disabled. The possible values are 1024 through 65535. This option is used to enter an additional port to which a Telnet menu connection can be established. This port is currently no different than the primary port 23.
TL1 Raw-TCP Port
Secondary Telnet Port
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-105
SNMP Menu The SNMP menu (see Figure 6-71) is used to provision the SNMP state and the SNMP traps. This menu is also used to enter information for the system ID, system location, system contact, read community, and write community.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->SNMP 1 - SNMP State 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SNMP Trap Trap Trap Trap Traps Host 1 Host 2 Host 3 Host 4 : Disabled : Disabled : 172.22.118.242
System ID System Location System Contact Read Community Write Community
: : : : :
Site 1 MX3112 SysLocation Not Set www.adtran.com public private
Selection :
Figure 6-71. SNMP Menu The SNMP menu option is shown in Table 6-37. Table 6-37. SNMP Menu Option
Option 1 Description SNMP State Function This option is used to enable or disable the SNMP state. Options are as follows: Disabled. When disabled, the MX3112 ignores all incoming SNMP packets and does not transmit SNMP packets. Enabled 2 SNMP Traps This option is used to enable or disable the SNMP traps. Options are as follows: Disabled Enabled 3-6 Trap Host 1 - 4 This option displays the Trap Host Menu on page 6-108.
6-106
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-37. SNMP Menu Option (Continued)

Option 7 Description System ID Function This option provides a user-configurable text string for the name of the MX3112. This name helps distinguish the MX3112 among different installations. Up to 20 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). This option provides a user-configurable text string for the location of the MX3112. This field is used to identify the physical location of the unit. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). This option provides a user-configurable text string for a SNMP contact name. This field can be used to enter the name, phone number, or e-mail address of a person responsible for the SNMP. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). This option is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Input a value that matches the MX3112 to the SNMP manager for read privileges. The SNMP read community name defaults to public. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore). This option is used to enter the authentication strings used for SNMP management. Input a value that matches the MX3112 to the SNMP manager for write privileges. The SNMP write community name defaults to private. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).
System Location
System Contact
10
Read Community
11
Write Community
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-107
Trap Host Menu The Trap Host menu (see Figure 6-72) is used to provision the status, the IP, the version, and the confirmation timeout and retries.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Network Management->SNMP->Trap Host 1 1 - Status 2 - IP : Valid : 172.22.118.242
3 - Version : Version 2 4 - Confirmation Timeout (sec) : 3 5 - Confirmation Retries : 0
Selection :
Figure 6-72. Trap Host Menu The Trap Host menu option is shown in Table 6-38. Table 6-38. Trap Host Menu Option
Option 1 Description Status Function This option is used to set the SNMP trap host status. Table 6-39 describes the SNMP trap host states. This option is used to enter the IP address of the SNMP manager to which the MX3112 sends traps. This option is used to select the SNMP version to be used for reporting traps to the SNMP manager. Options are as follows: Version 1 Version 2
2 3
IP Version
6-108
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-38. Trap Host Menu Option (Continued)

Option 4 Description Confirmation Time (sec) Function This option is used to set the initial timeout, in seconds, for each trap sent to the SNMP manager if confirmations are enabled. On each subsequent retry, the timeout will be doubled. The default value is three seconds. This option is used to set the maximum number of times that the MX3112 system will send a trap to the host. If set to zero, the MX3112 system will disable trap confirmation. If set to a value greater than zero, the MX3112 system will enable trap confirmation. The default value is zero.
Confirmation Retries
Table 6-39. Trap Host Status

Option 1 States Valid Function This status is used after the trap host parameters have been configured. This will enable trap reporting. This status is used while the trap host parameters are being configured. This status is used to disable traps for the specified trap host.
2 3
Under Creation Invalid
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-109
Auto Save Menu The Auto Save menu (see Figure 6-73) provides the option to save provisioning settings each minute if enabled.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Auto Save : Enabled 1 - Disabled 2 - Enabled Will Save Provisioning Each Minute If Enabled
Selection :
Figure 6-73. Auto Save Menu The Auto Save menu options are shown in Table 6-40. Table 6-40. Auto Save Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description Disabled Enabled Function This option is used to disable the auto save option. This option automatically saves current network settings at one minute intervals if any changes have been made.
6-110
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Security Administration Menu The Security Administration menu (see Figure 6-74) provides access to all user accounts.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration
1 2 3 4
Users Currently Logged On Edit User Accounts Access Tech Support Account Restore Default Security Settings
Selection :
Figure 6-74. Security Administration Menu The Security Administration menu options are shown in Table 6-41. Table 6-41. Security Administration Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 Description Users Currently Logged On Edit User Accounts Access Tech Support Account Restore Default Security Settings Function This option displays the Users Currently Logged On Screen on page 6-112. This option displays the Edit Accounts Menu on page 6-113. This option displays the Access Tech Support Account Screen on page 6-116. This option is used to restore all security options to the default settings.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-111
Users Currently Logged On Screen The Users Currently Logged On screen (see Figure 6-75) displays all users currently logged in to the MX3112 system.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE Users Currently Logged On USER ACCESS ADMIN IP 1 TYPE Menu
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
FROM 172.22.117.239
TIME 01/01/05 12:00:00
Figure 6-75. Users Currently Logged On Screen The Users Currently Logged On screen fields are shown in Table 6-42. Table 6-42. Users Currently Logged On Screen Fields
Field Users Currently Logged On USER ACCESS Description This field displays the number of users currently logged on. This field displays the account name. This field displays the access as one of the following: Craft. User is logged on through the front panel craft port of the MX3112 controller card. IP. User is logged on through a Telnet connection via the primary (23) or secondary Telnet port. TYPE This field displays the type as one of the following: Menu TL1 (This option is not available at this time.) FROM TIME This field displays the IP address if access is IP. This field displays the logon date and time.
6-112
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Edit Accounts Menu The Edit Accounts menu (see Figure 6-76) allows access to manage all user accounts.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Num 1. 2. 3. 4.
MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Edit Accounts USER STATUS NUM LOGINS ACCESS RIGHTS ADMIN ENABLED 1 ADMIN READONLY ENABLED 0 READ READWRITE ENABLED 0 READ/WRITE TEST ENABLED 0 TEST
Selection : (N)ew Account
Figure 6-76. Edit Accounts Menu The Edit Accounts menu options are shown in Table 6-43. Table 6-43. Edit Accounts Menu Options
Option 1-4 Description USER Function This option is used to select the user account that will be configured.
The Edit Accounts menu hot key is shown in Table 6-44. Table 6-44. Edit Accounts Menu Hot Key
Hot Key
N
Description New Account
Function This hot key is used to create a new user account. Pressing the hot key displays a screen where the new user name can be entered. The new user account can then be selected from the Edit Accounts menu.
Table 6-45 provides the default account names and passwords for the MX3112 system.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-113
Table 6-45. Edit User Accounts Menu Options

Account Level READ ONLY READ/WRITE TEST ADMIN TECH SUPPORT* Account Name READONLY READWRITE TEST ADMIN Challenge Key Account Password PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD PASSWORD Response Key
* The Tech Support Account Level is established and accessed as directed by ADTRAN Technical Support during troubleshooting and analysis.
6-114
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Edit User Account Menu The Edit User Account menu (see Figure 6-77) is used to edit or delete user accounts.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Edit Accounts->Edit User: ADMIN 1 2 3 4 Enable/Disable User Account Access Rights Change Password Delete User : ENABLED : ADMIN
Selection :
Figure 6-77. Edit User Account Menu The Edit User Account menu options are shown in Table 6-46. Table 6-46. Edit User Account Menu Options
Option 1 Description Enable/Disable User Account Function This option is used to enable or disable an user account. Options are as follows: Disabled Enabled The ADMIN account can not be disabled. 2 Access Rights This option sets the access rights level for the selected account. Options are as follows: READ. This level allows the user to see but not change the current system configuration. TEST. This level allows system testing. READ/WRITE. This level allows the user to both see and change system configuration parameters. ADMIN. This level is reserved for system or network administrators. 3 4 Change Password Delete User This option is used to enter a new password. This option is used to delete a user account.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-115
Access Tech Support Account Screen The Access Tech Support Account screen (see Figure 6-78) provides access to a technical support account.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Provisioning->Security Administration->Access Tech Support Account Challenge Key: 865C7382 Enter Response Key:
To receive a Tech Support Account 'Response Key', provide the 'Challenge Key' shown above to an authorized Adtran factory representative. Entry of a valid Response Key will promote this menu session to the Tech Support level.
Figure 6-78. Access Tech Support Account Screen To receive a technical support response key, provide the challenge key that appears on the screen to an authorized Adtran factory representative. Refer to ADTRAN Technical Support on page A-1 for contact information. Entry of a valid response key will promote this menu session to the technical support level.
6-116
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Quick Setup Menu To simplify the installation process, all of the basic configuration options necessary to get the MX3112 system running are grouped together on the Quick Setup menu (see Figure 6-79 for copper mode and Figure 6-80 for DS3 mode). The Quick Setup menu allows configuration of such items as application mode and Ethernet client ports, as well as system date, time, IP Address information, and bonding group assignments. CAUTION Changing IP settings will terminate all active telnet sessions.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: RT : Copper : Enabled
: : : : : : :
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Bonding Group Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Figure 6-79. Quick Setup Menu (Copper Mode)
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-117
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: RT : DS3 : Enabled
: : : : : : :
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Bonding Group Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
Figure 6-80. Quick Setup Menu (DS3 Mode) The Quick Setup menu options are shown in Table 6-47. Table 6-47. Quick Setup Menu Options
Option
Copper DS3
Description COT/RT
Function This option determines whether the MX3112 controller operates as the master (COT) or as the slave (RT). Options are as follows: COT RT. This option is the default setting and is typically used when the MX3112 system is connected to the OPTI-6100 GEFM. When this option is set to COT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Local. When this option is set to RT mode, the transmit timing for the bonded DS1s is automatically provisioned as Loop. These timing options can be changed independently if needed. When operating in COT mode, the unit will periodically transmit certain provisioning information toward the RT device via the bonded DS1s. This information includes the bonding group assignments for each DS1.
6-118
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-47. Quick Setup Menu Options (Continued)

Option
Copper DS3
Description Copper/DS3
Function This parameter determines whether the network interface on the MX3112 system is configured for Copper Mode (twelve DS1s) or for DS3 Mode (channelized DS3). Options are as follows: Copper DS3 Reference the Application Guidelines on page 3-1 for a detail explanation of this option.
Auto-Provisioning
This option, which is only available when the system is provisioned for RT mode, is used to select the auto provisioning state. Options are as follows: Disabled. This option disables auto provisioning. When disabled, the unit will not respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The bonding group assignments must be performed manually. Enabled. This option enables auto provisioning. When enabled, the unit will respond to the bonding group assignment messages received from the COT system. The automatic provisioning will override any manual bonding group assignments performed at the RT. The System ID of the RT is sent to the COT. This parameter is typically programmed into the MX3112 system when it is installed and will allow a user friendly ID to be displayed on the configuration screen of the COT. This option is not displayed when the COT/RT option is set to COT.
4 5 6
4 5 6
Select Ethernet Client Ports Packet Flows Rear Ethernet State
This option displays the Ethernet Client Ports Menu on page 6-90. This option displays the Packet Flows Menu on page 6-83. This option is used to provision the Ethernet port on the rear of the MX3 chassis. Options are as follows: Disabled Enabled
IP Address
This option is used to enter the IP Address. The IP Address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-119

Option
Copper DS3
Description Subnet Mask
Function This option is used to enter the subnet mask. A subnet mask is used to reduce the traffic on each subnetwork by confining traffic to only the subnetwork for which it was intended. A subnet mask makes the entire network more manageable. In effect, each subnet functions as though it were an independent network, keeping local traffic local and forwarding traffic to another subnet only if the address of the data is external to the subnet. The Subnet Mask is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255. This option is used to enter the default gateway/ router between the internal network and the external network. The gateway address is written in the format XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, where each 3-digit field has a value between 000 and 255. This option is used to enter the date. This option is used to enter the time. This option is used to enter the system ID. This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS1 port. Enter 1 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 1. Enter 2 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 2. Enter 3 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 3. Enter 4 to assign a DS1 port to Bonding Group 4. Enter 0 to remove a DS1 from the assigned bonding group.
Gateway
10 11 12 1324
10 11 12 N/A
Date Time System ID Bonding Group 1 - 12
6-120
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A

Option
Copper DS3
Description DS3 Tributary 13 - 24
Function This option is used to enter the bonding group assignment for each DS3 tributary. Enter 1 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 1. Enter 2 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 2. Enter 3 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 3. Enter 4 to assign a DS3 tributary to Bonding Group 4. Enter 0 to remove a DS3 from the assigned bonding group. When in RT mode and auto provisioning is enabled, the bonding group is automatically configured by the COT.
N/A
1324
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-121
Status Menu The Status menu (see Figure 6-81 for copper mode and Figure 6-82 for DS3 mode) provides summarized status information about the major areas of the system. Navigate to submenus to obtain more detailed information.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Status 1 - Controller Equipment Active (Card A) : Normal Standby (Card B) : Not Installed 2 - Environmental Alarms State : Major
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
3 - Ethernet Client Ports <1-4> : Down Down Down Down 4 - DS1 <1-4> <5-8> <9-12> Ports : LOS : LOS : LOS
LOS LOS LOS
LOS LOS LOS
LOS LOS LOS
5 - Bonding Group Status <1-2> : OK N/A <3-4> : N/A N/A Timing : Loop
Selection :
Figure 6-81. Status Menu (Copper Mode)
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Status 1 - Controller Equipment Active (Card A) : Normal Standby (Card B) : Not Installed 2 - DS3 (DS3 A) State : DS3-ALARM Status : LOS OOF DS2-OOF 3 - Environmental Alarms State : Minor
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
4 - Ethernet Client Ports <1-4> : Down Down Down Down 5 - DS1 <1-4> <5-8> <9-12> Ports : LOS : LOS : LOS
LOS LOS LOS
LOS LOS LOS
LOS LOS LOS
6 - Bonding Group Status <1-2> : N/A N/A <3-4> : N/A N/A Timing : Loop
Selection :
Figure 6-82. Status Menu (DS3 Mode) The Status menu options are shown in Table 6-48.
6-122
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-48. Status Menu Options

Option
Copper DS3
Description Controller Equipment DS3 Environmental Alarms Ethernet Client Ports DS1 Ports Bonding Group Status
Function This option displays the Controller Equipment Screen on page 6-124. This option displays the DS3 Status Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-126. This option displays the Environmental Alarms Screen on page 6-130. This option displays the Ethernet Client Ports Screen on page 6-132. This option displays the DS1 Ports Status Screen on page 6-133. This option displays the DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen on page 6-135.
1 N/A 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 6
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-123
Controller Equipment Screen The Controller Equipment screen (see Figure 6-83) displays the status of the active card, standby card, and alarms.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Status->Controller Equipment Active (Card A) Standby (Card B) Alarms : Normal : Not Installed : None
Figure 6-83. Controller Equipment Screen The Controller Equipment screen fields are shown in Table 6-49. Table 6-49. Controller Equipment Screen Fields
Field Active Standby Alarms Description This field displays the status of the active card as shown in Table 6-50. This field displays the status of the standby card as shown in Table 651. This field displays the conditions of the alarms as shown in Table 6-52.
Table 6-50. Status for Active Card

Status Normal Software Update Max Switches Exceeded Card Failure Description Indicates normal operating mode. Indicates software update in progress. Indicates the maximum switching threshold has been exceeded. Indicates card failure has occurred.
6-124
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-51. Status for Standby Card

Status Ready Not Installed Software Update Not Ready Not Ready - Code Mismatch Comm Failure Card Failure Description Indicates card is ready and acting as a backup module. Indicates card is not installed in the designated slot. Indicates software update is in progress. Indicates card configuration is in progress. Indicates active card should be reset to run new code. Indicates modules are not able to communicate with each other. Indicates card has failed and should be replaced.
Table 6-52. Alarm Conditions

Condition None Card Failure - Active Card Card Failure - Standby Card Switch to Protect Comm Failure Code Mismatch Description Indicates no alarms. Indicates active card has failed. Indicates standby card has failed. Indicates a module switch has occurred. Indicates the active and standby modules are not able to communicate with each other. Indicates code versions on active and standby cards do not match. Reset the active card to run new code.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-125
DS3 Status Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS3 Status menu (see Figure 6-84) displays the status for the DS3.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Status->DS3 DS3 Alarm Rx Status : LOS OOF : LOS OOF
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Tx Clock Source Tx Framing Test Status : No Test
: Local : M23
Rx Framing : Unknown Rx FEAC : Unknown DS2s <1-7>
OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF OOF
DS1 Tributaries in DS3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AIS TEST 1 - Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3 Selection : '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-84. DS3 Status Menu The DS3 Status menu fields are shown in Table 6-53. Table 6-53. DS3 Status Menu Fields
Field Alarm Rx Status Description This field displays the conditions of the alarms as shown in Table 6-54. This field displays the current status of the network. Possible states are as follows: OK LOS OOF AIS RAI IDLE Rx Framing This field displays the network framing type. Types are as follows: C-bit M23 Unknown Rx FEAC This field displays the conditions of the remote system shown in Table 6-55.
6-126
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-53. DS3 Status Menu Fields (Continued)

Field Tx Clock Source Description This field displays the network clock source. Types are as follows: Loop Local Tx Framing This field displays the network framing type. Types are as follows: C-bit M23 Test Status This field displays the current test status of the network. Possible states are as follows: No Test Line Loopback Digital Loopback Remote Loopback Remote ALL T1 Far Requested Line DS2s 1-7 This field displays the conditions of the seven DS2s as shown in Table 6-56.
Table 6-54. Alarm Conditions

Condition None RAI Description Indicates no alarms are currently being received. Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero. Indicates the MX3112 system has lost the Rx signal. Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (blue) alarm from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates there is a transmission fault located either at the transmitting terminal or upstream from the transmitting terminal. Indicates the MX3112 system detects a framing loss from the network. Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving excessive code violations from the network, which are exceeding the threshold set by the XCV Threshold parameter. Indicates the MX3112 system detects an idle sequence from the network. Service is immediately available for use. Indicates the MX3112 system is receiving an alarm from the far end DS3 system.
LOS AIS
OOF XCV
IDLE FEAC
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-127
Table 6-55. Remote System Conditions

Condition Normal DS3 RAI Description Indicates the far end MX3112 system is not reporting any conditions. Indicates the far end unit is receiving an Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) (yellow) alarm from the network. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to zero. Indicates the far end unit has lost the Rx signal. Indicates the far end unit is receiving an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) (blue) alarm condition from the network. AIS alarms occur when consecutive 1010s are received in the information bits. This indicates there is a transmission fault located either at the transmitting terminal or upstream from the transmitting terminal. Indicates the far end unit detects a framing loss, Loss of Frame (LOF), from the network. Indicates the far end unit detects an idle sequence from the network. Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a service-affecting (SA) DS3 equipment failure. Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting (NSA) DS3 equipment failure. Indicates the far end unit or network is reporting a non-service-affecting common equipment failure. Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on multiple DS1s. Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a loss of signal on a single DS1. Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a service-affecting DS1 equipment failure. Indicates the far end unit is experiencing a non-service-affecting DS1 equipment failure. Indicates the unit is unable to discern the status of the far end unit. (Normal state for M13 framing.)
DS3 LOS DS3 AIS
DS3 LOF DS3 Idle DS3 Eqpt Fail (SA) DS3 Eqpt Fail (NSA) Common Eqpt Fail Multiple DS1 LOS Single DS1 LOS DS1 Eqpt Fail (SA) DS1 Eqpt Fail (NSA) Unknown
6-128
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-56. DS2 Conditions

Condition OK OOF RAI Description Indicates the DS2 is not receiving alarms. Indicates the unit detects a framing loss across the DS2. Indicates the unit is receiving a RAI (yellow) alarm from the network across a DS2. This alarm is a signal sent back toward the source of a failed transmit circuit. The X-bit is set to zero. Indicates the unit is receiving an AIS (blue) alarm condition from the network across the DS2. AIS alarms occur when the unit receives unframed all ones.
AIS
The DS3 Status menu option is shown in Table 6-57. Table 6-57. DS3 Status Menu Option
Option 1 Description Go to Test Menu for DS1s in DS3 A/B Function This option displays the DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-146.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-129
Environmental Alarms Screen The Environmental Alarms screen (see Figure 6-85) displays the status of the DS1 ports.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Status->Environmental Alarms External Inputs AUX #1 Input AUX #2 Input AUX #3 Input AUX #4 Input PWR BUS A PWR BUS B ACO Status Alarm Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Level Major Major Major Major Major Major N/A
Selection :
Figure 6-85. Environmental Alarms Screen The Environmental Alarms screen fields are shown in Table 6-58. Table 6-58. Environmental Alarms Screen Fields
Field External Inputs Alarm Status Description This field displays the external inputs as shown in Table 6-59. This field displays the alarm status as one of the following: Active Inactive Level This field displays the alarm level as one of the following: Disabled Info Alert Minor Major Critical N/A (ACO Only)
6-130
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-59. Environmental Alarm External Inputs

External Input AUX #1 Input AUX #2 Input AUX #3 Input AUX #4 Input PWR BUS A Description This input indicates open or closed relay contacts for AUX #1. This input indicates open or closed relay contacts for AUX #2. This input indicates open or closed relay contacts for AUX #3. This input indicates open or closed relay contacts for AUX #4. This input generates an alarm signal when power feed A fails. When both power feeds fail, a critical alarm will not be generated. A complete power failure at the MX3112 system is detected by communication loss at attached devices. This input generates an alarm signal when power feed B fails. When both power feeds fail, a critical alarm will not be generated. A complete power failure at the MX3112 system is detected by communication loss at attached devices. This field displays the current status of the ACO inputs. This includes the front panel ACO switch and any auxiliary inputs configured as ACO.
PWR BUS B
ACO Status
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-131
Ethernet Client Ports Screen The Ethernet Client Ports screen (see Figure 6-86) displays the current link status and link speed and duplex of each Ethernet client port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Status->Ethernet Client Ports
Port 1 2 3 4
Link Status Up Up Up Up
Link Speed & Duplex 100, Full 100, Full 100, Full 100, Full
Figure 6-86. Ethernet Client Ports Screen The Ethernet Client Ports screen fields are shown in Table 6-60. Table 6-60. Ethernet Client Ports Screen Fields
Field Port Link Status Link Speed & Duplex Description This field displays the Ethernet client port number. This field displays the current status as either Up or Down. This field displays one of the following speeds as active: 10 Mbps, Half 100 Mbps, Half 10 Mbps, Full 100 Mbps, Full Unknown
6-132
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Ports Status Screen The DS1 Ports Status screen (see Figure 6-87) displays the test status for each DS1 port.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Status->DS1 Ports DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Status LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS LOS Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test No Test
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Figure 6-87. DS1 Ports Status Screen The DS1 Ports Status screen fields are shown in Table 6-61. Table 6-61. DS1 Ports Status Screen Fields
Field DS1 Port Status Description This field displays the DS1 port number. This field displays the current line status of the DS1 ports. The possible states are as follows: OK CV AIS LOS AUTO OFF
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-133
Table 6-61. DS1 Ports Status Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Test Description This field displays the current test status of the DS1 ports. The possible states are as follows: No Test. Indicates no tests are active. Analog Network Digital Line CSU Loopback CSU LB w/ Pattern NIU Loopback NIU LB w/ Pattern Pattern Test Far Requested Analog Net
6-134
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen The DS1 Bonding Group Status screen (see Figure 6-88 for copper mode and Figure 6-89 for DS3 mode) displays the current status for each DS1 bonding group and each DS1 port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Status->DS1 Bonding Groups | Unbonded | | DS1 | Port | Status 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | Relative skew | Group 1 | Group 2 | OK | OK | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | | | Status Skew | Status Skew | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | | | | | | | | | | | is displayed in milliseconds. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Group 4 | OK | Skew Thrs=4 | Status Skew | Status Skew | | | | | | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 '?' - System Help Screen Group 3 OK Skew Thrs=4
Figure 6-88. DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen (Copper Mode)
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Status->DS1 Bonding Groups | Unbonded | | DS3 | Status Trib | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | Relative skew | Group 1 | Group 2 | OK | OK | Skew Thrs=4 | Skew Thrs=4 | | | Status Skew | Status Skew | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | | | | | | | | | | | | is displayed in milliseconds. | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Group 4 | OK | Skew Thrs=4 | Status Skew | Status Skew | | | | | | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 | | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 | OK 0.0 '?' - System Help Screen Group 3 OK Skew Thrs=4
Figure 6-89. DS1 Bonding Groups Status Screen (DS3 Mode) The DS1 Bonding Group Status screen fields are shown in Table 6-62.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-135
Table 6-62. DS1 Bonding Group Status Screen Fields

Field Group 1 - 4 Description This field displays the status of each bonding group. The possible states are as follows: N/A. Indicates no DS1s are bonded to this group. OK. Indicates the status of all DS1s bonded to a group is OK. PARTIAL. Indicates an error condition exists on all but at least one of the DS1s in a bonded group. DOWN. Indicates an error condition exists on all of the DS1s in a bonded group. Skew Thrs DS1 Status Skew Status This field displays the provisioned skew threshold (in milliseconds) for the bonding group. This field displays the possible states in order of precedence of each DS1 port as shown in Table 6-63. This field displays the relative skew value of each DS1 in a bonded group. N/A is displayed if an error condition prevents calculation.
Table 6-63. DS1 Port States

Status OK SKEW NO SYNC FE FAIL CRC LOF XCV RAI TEST DISABLE NE OOS Description Indicates the DS1 is okay (no anomalies). Indicates the measured skew for the DS1 has exceeded the provisioned threshold. Indicates loss of synchronization at the DS1 interface of the bonding engine with the far end system. Indicates a problem has been detected at the far end system. Indicates coding violations are detected, with a rate is below the provisioned threshold. Indicates loss of frame. Indicates coding violations are detected, with a rate in excess of the provisioned threshold. Indicates a Remote Alarm Indication is received. Indicates a loopback is activated on this system. Indicates the state option of the DS1 is provisioned as disabled. Indicates the DS1 state has been provisioned out-of-service on the main system.
6-136
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-63. DS1 Port States (Continued)

Status FE OOS LINK ID LPBK Description Indicates the DS1 state has been provisioned out-of-service on the far end system. Indicates a link ID mismatch is detected on the DS1 (the received value is not equal to the expected value). Indicates an external loopback is detected on the DS1.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-137
Test Menu The Test menu (see Figure 6-90 for copper mode and Figure 6-91 for DS3 mode) provides options for testing the DS1 Ports.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Test DS1 Ports 1 - # 1 : 2 - # 2 : 3 - # 3 : 4 - # 4 : 5 - # 5 : 6 - # 6 : 7 - # 7 : 8 - # 8 : 9 - # 9 : 10 - #10 : 11 - #11 : 12 - #12 : No No No No No No No No No No No No Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test 14 15 16 17 -
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
Test Alarm Relays Reset ALL Tests Test Timeout Pattern
: 5 minutes : QRSS
13 - Bonding DS1s
Selection :
Figure 6-90. Test Menu (Copper Mode)
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Test DS1 Ports 1 - # 1 : 2 - # 2 : 3 - # 3 : 4 - # 4 : 5 - # 5 : 6 - # 6 : 7 - # 7 : 8 - # 8 : 9 - # 9 : 10 - #10 : 11 - #11 : 12 - #12 : No No No No No No No No No No No No Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test 14 - DS3
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
: No Test : No Test
15 - DS1s in DS3 16 17 18 19 -
Test Alarm Relays Reset ALL Tests Test Timeout Pattern
: 5 minutes : QRSS
13 - Bonding DS1s
Selection :
Figure 6-91. Test Menu (DS3 Mode) The Test menu options are shown in Table 6-64.
6-138
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-64. Test Menu Options

Option
Copper DS3
Description DS1 Ports #1 - #12 Bonding DS1s Bonding DS1s DS3 DS1s in DS3 Test Alarm Relays Reset ALL Tests Test Timeout
Function This option displays the DS1 Port Test Menu on page 6-140. This option displays the Bonding DS1s Menu (Copper Mode Only) on page 6-142. This option displays the Bonding DS1s Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-143. This option displays the DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-145. This option displays the DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-146. This option displays the Test Alarm Relays Menu on page 6-149. This option is used to cancel all test and return all test to data mode. This option is used to select the test timeout. Options are as follows: Disabled 1 minute 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes
112 13 N/A N/A N/A 14 15 16
112 N/A 13 14 15 16 17 18
17
19
Pattern
This option is used to select the test pattern used by the internal BERT. Options are as follows: QRSS ALL ONES ALL ZEROS 2 IN 8 (2:6) 1 IN 8 (1:7) 2^15-1 INV
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-139
DS1 Port Test Menu The DS1 Port Test menu (see Figure 6-92) provides testing options that can be run on the DS1 ports. CAUTION Enabling a test will interrupt customer payload on the selected DS1 port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
DS1 Port #1 Test : No Test 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No Test Analog Network Digital Line CSU Loopback CSU LB w/ Pattern NIU Loopback NIU LB w/ Pattern Pattern Test
Selection :
Figure 6-92. DS1 Port Test Menu The DS1 Port Test menu options are shown in Table 6-65. Table 6-65. DS1 Port Test Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description No Test Analog Network Function When this mode is selected, no test are active and the customer payload is uninterrupted. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DSX-1 line interface. This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line.
3 4
Digital Line CSU Loopback
6-140
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-65. DS1 Port Test Menu Options (Continued)

Option 5 Description CSU LB w/ Pattern Function This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT. This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line. This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT. This test sends test patterns using the internal BERT.
6 7
NIU Loopback NIU LB w/ Pattern
Pattern Test
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-141
Bonding DS1s Menu (Copper Mode Only) The Bonding DS1s menu (see Figure 6-93) is used to select the type of test to be performed on each DS1 port.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Test->Bonding DS1s DS1 Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Test No No No No No No No No No No No No Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Selection :
Figure 6-93. Bonding DS1s Menu The Bonding DS1s menu options are shown in Table 6-66. Table 6-66. Bonding DS1s Menu Options
Option 1 - 12 Description DS1 Port 1 - 12 Function This option is used to select the type of test to be performed. A description of each test is shown in Table 6-67.
Table 6-67. Bonded DS1 Tests

Test No Test Line Description No test is activated. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. All data is looped back, including framing and payload data. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3 in DS3 mode or the DSX-1 line interface in copper mode. The payload data is looped back, whereas the framing is regenerated.
Payload
6-142
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Bonding DS1s Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The Bonding DS1s menu (see Figure 6-94) is used to select the test to be performed on each DS3 tributary. CAUTION Enabling a test on a DS3 will interrupt customer payload on all DS1s transported over the DS3.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Test->Bonding DS1s DS3 Trib 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Test No No No No No No No No No No No No Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Selection :
Figure 6-94. Bonding DS1s Menu The Bonding DS1s menu options are shown in Table 6-68. Table 6-68. Bonding DS1s Menu Options
Option 1 - 12 Description DS3 Trib 13 - 24 Function This option is used to select the type of test to be performed. A description of each test is shown in Table 6-69.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-143
Table 6-69. DS1 Tributary Tests

Test No Test Line Payload Description No test is activated. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. All data is looped back, including framing and payload data. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. The payload data is looped back, whereas the framing is regenerated.
6-144
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS3 Test menu (see Figure 6-95) provides testing options that can be run on the DS3. CAUTION Enabling a test on a DS3 will interrupt customer payload on all DS1s transported over the DS3.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
DS3 Test : No Test 1 2 3 4 5 No Test Line Loopback Digital Loopback Remote Loopback Remote ALL T1
Selection :
Figure 6-95. DS3 Test Menu The DS3 Test menu options are shown in Table 6-70. Table 6-70. DS3 Test Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 5 Description No Test Line Loopback Digital Loopback Remote Loopback (C-bit Only) Remote ALL T1 (C-bit Only) Function When this mode is selected, no test are active and the customer payload is uninterrupted. This test loops towards the DS3 line but excludes the DS3 framer. This test loops the DS3 toward the DS1 tributaries. This test performs a line loopback at the equipment on the other end of the DS3. This test performs a tributary loopback on all DS1s in the DS3 at the equipment on the other end of the DS3.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-145
DS1s in DS3 Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS1s in DS3 menu (see Figure 6-96) displays the test that is selected for each of the tributaries.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->Test->DS1s in DS3
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test
Selection :
'?' - System Help Scree
Figure 6-96. DS1s in DS3 Menu The DS1s in DS3 menu options are shown in Table 6-71. Table 6-71. DS1s in DS3 Menu Options
Option 1 - 28 Description DS1 Ports #1 - 28 Function This option displays the DS1 in DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-147.
6-146
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 in DS3 Test Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS1 in DS3 Test menu (see Figure 6-97) provides testing options that can be run on each tributary.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
DS1 #1 in DS3 Test : No Test 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No Test Tributary Loopback Remote Loopback Remote Loopback w/ Pattern CSU Loopback CSU LB w/ Pattern NIU Loopback NIU LB w/ Pattern Pattern Test
Selection :
Figure 6-97. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu The DS1 in DS3 Test menu options are shown in Table 6-72. Table 6-72. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 Description No Test Tributary Loopback Remote Loopback Function When this mode is selected, no test are active and the customer payload is uninterrupted. This test activates a DS1 loopback toward the DS3. This test performs a tributary loopback on the selected DS1 in the DS3 terminated at the connecting equipment. This test activates a remote loopback at the far end system, and then, generates a test pattern toward that loopback. This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line. This test sends CSU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT.
Remote Loopback w/ Pattern
5 6
CSU Loopback CSU LB w/ Pattern
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-147
Table 6-72. DS1 in DS3 Test Menu Options (Continued)

Option 7 8 Description NIU Loopback NIU LB w/ Pattern Function This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line. This test sends NIU loop up commands towards the DSX-1 line and sends test patterns using the internal BERT. This test sends test patterns using the internal BERT.
Pattern Test
6-148
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Test Alarm Relays Menu The Test Alarm Relays menu with the Alarm Relay Test Status option set to Inactive is shown in Figure 6-98. Figure 6-99 shows the Test Alarm Relays menu with the Alarm Relay Test Status option set to Active.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Test->Test Alarm Relays 1 - Alarm Relay Test Status : Inactive
Selection :
Figure 6-98. Test Alarm Relays Menu with Inactive Alarm Relay Test Status
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Test->Test Alarm Relays 1 - Alarm Relay Test Status 2 - Toggle Critical Relay 3 - Toggle Major Relay 4 - Toggle Minor Relay 5 - Toggle All Relays : Active : Active : Active : Active
Selection :
Figure 6-99. Test Alarm Relays Menu with Active Alarm Relay Test Status
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-149
The Test Alarm Relays menu options are shown in Table 6-73. Table 6-73. Test Alarm Relays Menu Options
Option 1 Field Alarm Relay Test Status Description This option is used to enable or disable the alarm relay test. Options are as follows: Inactive. Test is disabled. Active. Test is enabled. Options 2 -5 are visible when this option is selected. 2 3 4 5 Toggle Critical Relay Toggle Major Relay Toggle Minor Relay Toggle All Relays This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status. This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status. This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status. This option is a toggle key to change between Inactive and Active status for all alarm relays at once.
6-150
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Performance Monitoring Menu The Performance Monitoring menu (see Figure 6-100 for copper mode and Figure 6-101 for DS3 mode) allows access to all performance monitoring options.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM 1 2 3 4 DS1 Port Statistics DS1 Bonding Statistics Bonding Group Statistics Ethernet Client Statistics
5 - Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data 6 - Reset ALL PM Data 7 - Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults 8 - Enable ALL PM Thresholds 9 - Disable ALL PM Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-100. Performance Monitoring Menu (Copper Mode)
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM 1 2 3 4 5 DS3 Statistics DS1 Port Statistics DS1 Bonding Statistics Bonding Group Statistics Ethernet Client Statistics
6 - Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data 7 - Reset ALL PM Data 8 - Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults 9 - Enable ALL PM Thresholds 10 - Disable ALL PM Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-101. Performance Monitoring Menu (DS3 Mode) The Performance Monitoring menu options are shown in Table 6-74.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-151
Table 6-74. Performance Monitoring Menu Options

Option
Copper DS3
Field DS3 Statistics DS1 Port Statistics DS1 Bonding Statistics Bonding Group Statistics Ethernet Client Statistics Reset ALL Current Interval PM Data Reset ALL PM Data Reset ALL PM Thresholds to Defaults Enable ALL PM Thresholds Disable ALL PM Thresholds
Description This option displays the DS3 Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-153. This option displays the DS1 Port Stats Menu on page 6-165. This option displays the DS1 Bonding Stats Menu on page 6-171. This option displays the Bonding Group Stats Menu on page 6-186. This option displays the Ethernet Stats Menu on page 6-192. This option is used to reset all current interval performance monitoring data. This option is used to reset all performance monitoring data. This option is used to reset all performance monitoring thresholds to the defaults. This option is used to enable all performance monitoring thresholds. This option is used to disable all performance monitoring thresholds.
N/A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
6-152
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS3 Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS3 Stats menu (see Figure 6-102) allows access to view all DS3 performance monitoring statistics and thresholds.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats 1 - Near End Daily 2 - Near End Quarter Hourly 3 - Far End Daily 4 - Far End Quarter Hourly 5 - Near End Daily Thresholds 6 - Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 7 - Far End Daily Thresholds 8 - Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 9 - Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data 10 - Reset DS3 PM Data
Selection :
Figure 6-102. DS3 Stats Menu The DS3 Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-75. Table 6-75. DS3 Stats Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Description Near End Daily Near End Quarter Hourly Far End Daily Far End Quarter Hourly Near End Daily Thresholds Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds Far End Daily Thresholds Field This option displays the Near End Daily Screen on page 6-156. This option displays the Near End Quarter Hourly Menu on page 6-157. This option displays the Far End Daily Screen on page 6-158. This option displays the Far End Quarter Hourly Menu on page 6-159. This option displays the Near End Thresholds Menu on page 6-161. This option displays the Near End Thresholds Menu on page 6-161. This option displays the Far End Thresholds Menu on page 6-163.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-153
Table 6-75. DS3 Stats Menu Options (Continued)

Option 8 9 10 Description Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds Reset DS3 Current Interval PM Data Reset DS3 PM Data Field This option displays the Far End Thresholds Menu on page 6-163. This option is used to reset the DS3 current interval PM data. This option is used to reset the DS3 PM data.
Table 6-76 provides descriptions for the DS3 near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-77 provides descriptions for the DS3 far end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. The CP-bit parameter descriptions apply to C-bit framing only. This includes the near end CVCP-P, ESCP-P, SESCP-P, and UASCP-P, and the far end CVCP-PFE, ESCP-PFE, SESCP-PFE, and UASCP-PFE. N/A will be displayed for these parameters when M13 framing is selected. Table 6-76. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions
Parameter CV-L Definition Code Violation - Line Description This parameter indicates the number of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) and Excessive Zeros (EXZs) that have occurred. This parameter indicates the number of seconds in which one or more Coding Violations (CVs) or one or more Loss-of-Signal (LOS) defects occurred. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more BPVs and EXZs, or one or more LOS defects. This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more LOS defects occurred. This parameter indicates the number of P-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when Unavailable Seconds (UASP-P) are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) defects. This count is not incremented when UASP-P are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one ore more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASP-P are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASP-P accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESP-Ps and stop accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESP-Ps.
ES-L
Errored Second - Line
SES-L LOSS-L CVP-P
Severely Errored Second Line Loss of Signal Second Line Code Violation, P-bit Parity - Path Errored Second, P-bit Parity - Path
ESP-P
SESP-P
Severely Errored Second, P-bit Parity - Path
UASP-P
Unavailable Second, P-bit Parity - Path
6-154
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-76. DS3 Near End Parameter Descriptions (Continued)

Parameter CVCP-P Definition Code Violation, CP-bit Parity - Path Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path Description This parameter indicates the number of CP-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-P are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASCP-P accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESCP-Ps and stop accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESCP-Ps.
ESCP-P
SESCP-P
Severely Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path
UASCP-P
Unavailable Second, CPbit Parity - Path
Table 6-77. DS3 Far End Parameter Descriptions

Parameter CVCP-PFE Definition Code Violation, CP-bit Parity - Path Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path Description This parameter indicates the number of CP-bit parity errors that have occurred. This count is not incremented when UAS are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with one or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-PFE are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 45 or more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects. This count is not incremented when UASCP-PFE are counted. This parameter indicates the number of seconds that the DS3 path is unavailable. UASP-PFE accumulates at the onset of 10 contiguous SESCP-PFEs and stop accumulating at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds without SESCP-PFEs.
ESCP-PFE
SESCP-PFE
Severely Errored Second, CP-bit Parity - Path
UASCP-PFE
Unavailable Second, CPbit Parity - Path
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-155
Near End Daily Screen The Near End Daily screen (see Figure 6-103) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Current CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L CVP-P ESP-P SESP-P UASP-P CVCP-P ESCP-P SESCP-P UASCP-P : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 43 43 43 0 0 0 43 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/01 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/02 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/03 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/04 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/05 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/06 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/07 0 60 60 60 0 0 0 60 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Figure 6-103. Near End Daily Screen Table 6-76 on page 154 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Daily screen.
6-156
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Near End Quarter Hourly Menu The Near End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-104) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-105).
ID:
01/01/05 13:30 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Quarter Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L CVP-P ESP-P SESP-P UASP-P CVCP-P ESCP-P SESCP-P UASCP-P : : : : : : : : : : : : 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 13:30 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 13:15 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 13:00 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 12:45 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 12:30 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 12:15 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 12:00 0 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0
Selection :
Figure 6-104. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu Table 6-76 on page 154 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu.
ID:
01/01/05 09:45 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-L 09:45 09:30 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 06:30 06:15 06:00 05:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05:30 05:15 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 02:15 02:00 01:45 01:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01:15 01:00 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 22:00 21:45 21:30 21:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21:00 20:45 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 17:45 17:30 17:15 17:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16:45 16:30 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45 14:30 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00 09:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Figure 6-105. 24-Hour History Screen

Far End Daily Screen The Far End Daily screen (see Figure 6-106) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days. NOTE These statistics do not apply if the DS3 framing is set to M23.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Current CVCP-PFE ESCP-PFE SESCP-PFE UASCP-PFE : : : : n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/01 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/02 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/03 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/04 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/05 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/06 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/07 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Figure 6-106. Far End Daily Screen Table 6-77 on page 155 provides definitions for the parameters used on Far End Daily screen.
6-158
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Far End Quarter Hourly Menu The Far End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-107) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-108). NOTE These statistics do not apply if the DS3 framing is set to M23.
ID:
01/01/05 14:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Quarterly Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 CVCP-PFE ESCP-PFE SESCP-PFE UASCP-PFE : : : : 0 0 0 0 14:00 0 0 0 0 13:45 0 0 0 0 13:30 0 0 0 0 13:15 0 0 0 0 13:00 0 0 0 0 12:45 0 0 0 0 12:30 0 0 0 0
Selection :
'?' - System Help Scree
Figure 6-107. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu Table 6-77 on page 155 provides definitions for the parameters used on Far End Quarter Hourly menu.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-159
ID:
01/01/05 10:15 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Quarterly Hourly->CVCP-PFE 10:15 10:00 09:45 09:30 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 06:30 06:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 06:00 05:45 05:30 05:15 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 02:15 02:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01:45 01:30 01:15 01:00 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 22:00 21:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21:30 21:15 21:00 20:45 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 17:45 17:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17:15 17:00 16:45 16:30 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45 14:30 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6-160
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Near End Thresholds Menu The Near End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-109) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-109 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Near End Daily Thresholds menu and the Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Thresholds Threshold 3865 250 40 20 3820 250 40 10 3820 250 40 10 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L CVP-P ESP-P SESP-P UASP-P CVCP-P ESCP-P SESCP-P UASCP-P
: : : : : : : : : : : :
Selection :
13 - Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults 14 - Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds 15 - Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds '?' - System Help Screen
Figure 6-109. Near End Thresholds Menu The Near End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-78. Table 6-78. Near End Thresholds Menu Options
Option 1 - 12 Description Near End Parameters (refer to Table 6-76 on page 154 for definitions) Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-162. This option is used to reset all DS3 PM thresholds to the factory defaults. This option is used to enable all DS3 PM thresholds. This option is used to disable all DS3 PM thresholds.
13 14 15
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-161
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-110) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6110 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS3 near end parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-L
1 - CV-L Threshold : 3865 2 - CV-L Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
Figure 6-110. Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu options are shown in Table 6-79. Table 6-79. Threshold and Alarm Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description Threshold Alarm Function This option is used to enter the desired threshold. This option is used to enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded.
6-162
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Far End Thresholds Menu The Far End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-111) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-111 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Far End Daily Thresholds menu and the Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Thresholds Threshold 3820 250 40 10 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4
CVCP-PFE ESCP-PFE SESCP-PFE UASCP-PFE
: : : :
5 - Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults 6 - Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds 7 - Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-111. Far End Thresholds Menu The Far End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-80. Table 6-80. Far End Thresholds Menu Options
Option 1 - 12 Description Far End Parameters (refer to Table 6-77 on page 155 for definitions) Reset ALL DS3 PM Thresholds to Defaults Enable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds Disable ALL DS3 PM Thresholds Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-164. This option is used to reset all DS3 PM thresholds to the factory defaults. This option is used to enable all DS3 PM thresholds. This option is used to disable all DS3 PM thresholds.
13 14 15
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-163
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-112) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6110 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS3 far end parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS3 Stats->Far End Daily Thresholds->CVCP-PFE
1 - CVCP-PFE Threshold : 3820 2 - CVCP-PFE Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
6-164
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Port Stats Menu The DS1 Port Stats menu (see Figure 6-113) allows access to DS1 port statistics.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 # 1 # 2 # 3 # 4 # 5 # 6 # 7 # 8 # 9 #10 #11 #12 [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data]
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
13 - Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-113. DS1 Port Stats Menu The DS1 Port Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-82. Table 6-82. DS1 Port Stats Menu Options
Option 1 - 12 13 14 15 16 17 Description DS1 #1 - #12 [PM Data] Reset ALL DS1 Port Current Interval PM Data Reset ALL DS1 Port PM Data Reset ALL DS1 Port Thresholds Enable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds Disable ALL DS1 Port Thresholds Field This option displays the DS1 # Port Stats Menu on page 6-166. This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for all DS1 ports. This option is used to reset all performance monitoring data for all DS1 ports. This option is used to reset thresholds for all DS1 ports. This option is used to enable thresholds for all DS1 ports. This option is used to disable thresholds for all DS1 ports.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-165
DS1 # Port Stats Menu The DS1 # Port Stats menu (see Figure 6-114) is used to view all performance monitoring statistics for the selected DS1 port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1 1 - Near End Daily 2 - Near End Quarter Hourly 3 - Near End Daily Thresholds 4 - Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 5 - Reset DS1 #1 Current Interval PM Data 6 - Reset DS1 #1 PM Data
Selection :
Figure 6-114. DS1 # Port Stats Menu The DS1 # Port Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-83. Table 6-83. DS1 # Port Stats Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Near End Daily Near End Quarter Hourly Near End Daily Thresholds Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data Reset DS1 # PM Data Field This option displays the Near End Daily Screen on page 6-167. This option displays the Near End Quarter Hourly Menu on page 6-168. This option displays the Near End Thresholds Menu on page 6-169. This option displays the Near End Thresholds Menu on page 6-169. This option is used to reset the current interval PM data for the selected DS1. This option is used to reset the PM data for the selected DS1.
Table 6-84 provides descriptions for the near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens.
6-166
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-84. Near End Parameter Descriptions

Parameter CV-L ES-L Definition Code Violation - Line Errored Second - Line Description This parameter indicates the number of Bipolar Violations (BPVs) that have occurred. This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more Coding Violations (CVs), or one or more Loss of Signal (LOS) defects occurred. This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 1544 or more BPVs or one or more LOS defects. This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which one or more LOS defects occurred.
SES-L LOSS-L
Severely Errored Second Line Loss of Signal Second Line
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Current CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L : : : : 0 27 27 28 01/01 0 60 60 60 01/02 0 60 60 60 01/03 0 60 60 60 01/04 0 60 60 60 01/05 0 60 60 60 01/06 0 60 60 60 01/07 0 60 60 60
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-167
ID:
01/01/05 11:30 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Quarter Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L : : : : 0 1 1 1 11:30 0 10 10 10 11:15 0 10 10 10 11:00 0 10 10 10 10:45 0 10 10 10 10:30 0 10 10 10 10:15 0 10 10 10 10:00 0 10 10 10
Selection :
Figure 6-116. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu Table 6-84 on page 167 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly Menu menu.
ID:
01/01/05 11:45 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-L 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00 09:45 09:30 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 06:30 06:15 06:00 05:45 05:30 05:15 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 02:15 02:00 01:45 01:30 01:15 01:00 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 22:00 21:45 21:30 21:15 21:00 20:45 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 17:45 17:30 17:15 17:00 16:45 16:30 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14:30 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Thresholds Threshold 133400 648 100 2 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4
CV-L ES-L SES-L LOSS-L
: : : :
5 - Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults 6 - Enable selected DS1 Thresholds 7 - Disable selected DS1 Thresholds
Selection :
Option 1-4 Description Near End Parameters (refer to Table 6-84 on page 167 for definitions) Reset selected DS1 Thresholds to Defaults Enable selected DS1 Thresholds Disable selected DS1 Thresholds Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-170. This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected DS1. This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected DS1. This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected DS1.
5 6 7
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-169
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-119) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6119 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the near end parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Port Stats->DS1 #1->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-L
1 - CV-L Threshold : 133400 2 - CV-L Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
6-170
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Bonding Stats Menu The DS1 Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-120 and Figure 6-121) allows access to the DS1 bonding statistics.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 DS1 # 1 # 2 # 3 # 4 # 5 # 6 # 7 # 8 # 9 #10 #11 #12 [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data]
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
13 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-120. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode)
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib Trib #13 #14 #15 #16 #17 #18 #19 #20 #21 #22 #23 #24 [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM [PM Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data] Data]
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
13 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data 14 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data 15 - Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 16 - Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds 17 - Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-121. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode) The DS1 Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-87.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-171
Table 6-87. DS1 Bonding Stats Menu Options

Option
Copper DS3
Field DS1 #1 - #12 (PM Data) Trib #13 - #24 (PM Data) Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Current Interval PM Data Reset ALL DS1 Bonding PM Data Reset ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds Enable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds Disable ALL DS1 Bonding Thresholds
Description This option displays the DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode Only) on page 6-173. This option displays the DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) on page 6-175. This option is used to reset all DS1 bonding current interval performance monitoring data. This option is used to reset all DS1 bonding performance monitoring data. This option is used to reset all DS1 bonding thresholds. This option is used to enable all DS1 bonding thresholds. This option is used to disable all DS1 bonding thresholds.
112 N/A 13 14 15 16 17
N/A 112 13 14 15 16 17
6-172
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu (Copper Mode Only) The DS1 # Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-123) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics for each DS1.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->DS1 #1 1 - Near End Daily 2 - Near End Quarter Hourly 3 - Far End Daily 4 - Far End Quarter Hourly 5 - Near End Daily Thresholds 6 - Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 7 - Far End Daily Thresholds 8 - Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 9 - Reset DS1 #1 Current Interval PM Data 10 - Reset DS1 #1 PM Data
Selection :
Figure 6-122. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu The DS1 # Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-89. Table 6-88. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-173
Table 6-88. DS1 # Bonding Stats Menu Options (Continued)

Option 8 9 10 Description Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds Reset DS1 # Current Interval PM Data Reset DS1 # PM Data Field This option displays the Far End Thresholds Menu on page 6-184. This option is used to reset the current interval performance monitoring data for the selected DS1. This option is used to reset the performance monitoring data for the selected DS1.
6-174
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu (DS3 Mode Only) The DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats menu (see Figure 6-123) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics for each DS1 tributary.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13 1 - Near End Daily 2 - Near End Quarter Hourly 3 - Far End Daily 4 - Far End Quarter Hourly 5 - Near End Daily Thresholds 6 - Near End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 7 - Far End Daily Thresholds 8 - Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds 9 - Reset Trib #13 Current Interval PM Data 10 - Reset Trib #13 PM Data
Selection :
Figure 6-123. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu The DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-89. Table 6-89. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-175
Table 6-89. DS1 Tributary # Bonding Stats Menu Options (Continued)

Option 8 9 Description Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds Reset Trib # Current Interval PM Data Reset Trib # PM Data Field This option displays the Far End Thresholds Menu on page 6-184. This option is used to reset the current interval performance monitoring data for the selected tributary. This option is used to reset the performance monitoring data for the selected tributary.
10
Table 6-90 provides descriptions for the near end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-91 provides descriptions for the far end parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-90. Near End Parameter Descriptions
Parameter CV-P Definition Coding Violations - Path Description SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of frame synchronization bit errors that have occurred during the accumulation period. ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of CRC-6 errors that have occurred during the accumulation period. ES-P Errored Seconds - Path SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds containing any of the following: FE (Frame bit Error). This parameter indicates the occurrence of a frame bit error in the received frame bit pattern. CS (Controlled Slip) Event. This parameter indicates the replication of deletion of the 192 payload bits of a DS1 frame by the receiving unit. SEF (Severely Errored Frame) Defect. This parameter indicates that two or more frame bit errors are detected in a window. AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) Defect. This parameter indicates the detection of an unframed signal with a 1s density of at least 99.9% for a time. ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds containing any of the following: CRC-6 (Cyclic Redundancy Check) Error. This parameter indicates the existence of a CRC-6 code that is not identical to the corresponding locally calculated code. CS Event SEF Defect AIS Defect
6-176
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-90. Near End Parameter Descriptions (Continued)

Parameter SES-P Definition Severely Errored Seconds Path Description SF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 8 or more FE events or one or more SEF or AIS defects. ESF Mode: This parameter indicates the number of seconds with 320 or more CRC-6 errors or one or more SEF or AIS defects. UAS-P Unavailable Seconds Path This parameter indicates the number of seconds for which the DS1 path contains 10 contiguous SESs.
Table 6-91. Far End Parameter Descriptions

Parameter CV-PFE Definition Coding Violations - Path Description This parameter indicates the number of far end CVs, based on PRM bits G1-G6, that have occurred during the accumulation period. CV-PFE counts will be inhibited if PRM bit G6 equals 1. This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals containing a RAI signal or an 1 in any of the following PRM bits: G1-G6, SE, or SL = 1. This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals containing an 1 in the following PRM bits: G1 and SE. This parameter indicates the number of one-second intervals for which the DS1 path is unavailable. UASPFE accumulates at the onset of ten contiguous SESPFE and stop accumulating at the onset of ten contiguous seconds without SES-PFE.
ES-PFE
Errored Seconds - Path
SES-PFE
Severely Errored Seconds Path Unavailable Seconds Path
UAS-PFE
Note: The parameters in this table are defined for ESF mode only. The parameters are not defined for SF mode.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-177
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Current CV-P ES-P SES-P UAS-P : : : : 0 0 0 0 01/01 0 0 0 0 01/02 0 0 0 0 01/03 0 0 0 0 01/04 0 0 0 0 01/05 0 0 0 0 01/06 0 0 0 0 01/07 0 0 0 0
6-178
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
ID:
01/01/05 13:15 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Quarter Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 CV-P ES-P SES-P UAS-P : : : : 0 0 0 707 13:15 0 0 0 899 13:00 0 0 0 900 12:45 0 0 0 900 12:30 0 0 0 899 12:15 0 0 0 900 12:00 0 0 0 899 11:45 0 0 0 900
Selection :
Figure 6-125. Near End Quarter Hourly Menu Table 6-90 on page 176 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Near End Quarter Hourly menu.
ID:
01/01/05 13:30 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Quarter Hourly->CV-P 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00 09:45 09:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 06:30 06:15 06:00 05:45 05:30 05:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 02:15 02:00 01:45 01:30 01:15 01:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 22:00 21:45 21:30 21:15 21:00 20:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 17:45 17:30 17:15 17:00 16:45 16:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45 14:30 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 0 0 0 0 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

Far End Daily Screen The Far End Daily screen (see Figure 6-127) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Current CV-PFE ES-PFE SES-PFE UAS-PFE : : : : n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/01 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/02 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/03 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/04 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/05 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/06 n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/07 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Figure 6-127. Far End Daily Screen Table 6-91 on page 177 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Far End Daily screen.
6-180
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Far End Quarter Hourly Menu The Far End Quarter Hourly menu (see Figure 6-128) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-129).
ID:
01/01/05 13:45 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Quarter Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 CV-PFE ES-PFE SES-PFE UAS-PFE : : : : n/a n/a n/a n/a 13:45 n/a n/a n/a n/a 13:30 n/a n/a n/a n/a 13:15 n/a n/a n/a n/a 13:00 n/a n/a n/a n/a 12:45 n/a n/a n/a n/a 12:30 n/a n/a n/a n/a 12:15 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Selection :
Figure 6-128. Far End Quarter Hourly Menu Table 6-91 on page 177 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Far End Quarter Hourly menu.
ID:
01/01/05 14:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Quarter Hourly->CV-PFE 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 09:45 09:30 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 06:30 06:15 06:00 05:45 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 05:30 05:15 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 02:15 02:00 01:45 01:30 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01:15 01:00 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 22:00 21:45 21:30 21:15 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 21:00 20:45 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 17:45 17:30 17:15 17:00 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 16:45 16:30 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45 14:30 14:15 14:00 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Thresholds Threshold 132960 648 100 10 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4
CV-P ES-P SES-P UAS-P
: : : :
5 - Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults 6 - Enable selected Trib Thresholds 7 - Disable selected Trib Thresholds
Selection :
Option 1-4 Description Near End Parameters (refer to Table 6-90 on page 176 for definitions) Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults Enable selected Trib Thresholds Disable selected Trib Thresholds Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-183. This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected tributary. This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected tributary. This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected tributary.
5 6 7
6-182
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-131) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6131 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS1 tributary near end parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Near End Daily Thresholds->CV-P
1 - CV-P Threshold : 132960 2 - CV-P Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-183
Far End Thresholds Menu The Far End Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-132) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-132 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Far End Daily Thresholds menu and the Far End Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Thresholds Threshold 132960 648 100 10 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4
CV-PFE ES-PFE SES-PFE UAS-PFE
: : : :
5 - Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults 6 - Enable selected Trib Thresholds 7 - Disable selected Trib Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-132. Far End Thresholds Menu The Far End Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-94. Table 6-94. Far End Thresholds Menu Options
Option 1-4 Description Far End Parameters (refer to Table 6-91 on page 177 for definitions) Reset selected Trib Thresholds to Defaults Enable selected Trib Thresholds Disable selected Trib Thresholds Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-185. This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected tributary. This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected tributary. This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected tributary.
5 6 7
6-184
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-112) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6110 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the DS1 tributary far end parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->DS1 Bonding Stats->Trib #13->Far End Daily Thresholds->CV-PFE
1 - CV-PFE Threshold : 132960 2 - CV-PFE Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-185
Bonding Group Stats Menu The Bonding Group Stats menu (see Figure 6-134) is used to access performance monitoring statistics for all bonding groups.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats 1 2 3 4 Bonding Bonding Bonding Bonding Group Group Group Group 1 2 3 4
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
5 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data 6 - Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data 7 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 8 - Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 9 - Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-134. Bonding Group Stats Menu The Bonding Group Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-96. Table 6-96. Bonding Group Stats Menu Options
Option 1-4 5 Description Bonding Group 1 - 4 Reset ALL Bonding Group Current Interval PM Data Reset ALL Bonding Group PM Data Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds Field This option displays the Bonding Group # Stats Menu on page 6-187. This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for all bonding groups. This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for all bonding groups. This option is used to reset thresholds for all bonding groups. This option is used to enable thresholds for all bonding groups. This option is used to disable thresholds for all bonding groups.
6 7 8 9
6-186
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Bonding Group # Stats Menu The Bonding # Group Stats menu (see Figure 6-135) is used to view statistics for each bonding group.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1 1 - Daily Performance 2 - Quarter Hourly Performance 3 - Daily Thresholds 4 - Quarter Hourly Thresholds 5 - Reset Bonding Group #1 Current Interval PM Data 6 - Reset Bonding Group #1 PM Data
Selection :
Figure 6-135. Bonding Group # Stats Menu The Bonding Group # Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-97. Table 6-97. Bonding Group # Stats Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 5 Description Daily Performance Quarter Hourly Performance Daily Thresholds Quarter Hourly Thresholds Reset Bonding Group # Current Interval PM Data Reset Bonding Group # PM Data Field This option displays the Daily Performance Screen on page 6-188. This option displays the Quarter Hourly Performance Menu on page 6-189. This option displays the Thresholds Menu on page 6-190. This option displays the Thresholds Menu on page 6-190. This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for the selected bonding group. This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for the selected bonding group.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-187
Table 6-98 provides descriptions for the bonding group parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-98. Bonding Group Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Rx Frames Rx Bytes Rx Errored Events Description Indicates the total number of frames received in a bonding group. Indicates the total number of bytes received in a bonding group. Indicates the total number of errored events in a bonding group (including bad sequence IDs, lost fragments, and lost frame starts and ends). Indicates the total number of frames transmitted in a bonding group. Indicates the total number of bytes transmitted in a bonding group.
Tx Frames Tx Bytes
Daily Performance Screen The Daily Performance screen (see Figure 6-136) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Current Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Frames : Bytes : Errored Events : Frames : Bytes : 0 0 0 0 0 01/01 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/02 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/03 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/04 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/05 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/06 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 01/07 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Figure 6-136. Daily Performance Screen Table 6-98 on page 188 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Daily Performance screen.
6-188
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Quarter Hourly Performance Menu The Quarter Hourly Performance menu (see Figure 6-137) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-138).
ID:
01/01/05 14:15 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Quarter Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 5 Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Frames : Bytes : Errored Events : Frames : Bytes : 0 0 0 0 0 14:15 0 0 0 0 0 14:00 0 0 0 0 0 13:45 0 0 0 0 0 13:30 0 0 0 0 0 13:15 0 0 0 0 0 13:00 0 0 0 0 0
Selection :
Figure 6-137. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu Table 6-98 on page 188 provides definitions for the parameters used on Quarter Hourly Performance menu.
ID:
01/01/05 14:30 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Quarter Hourly->Rx Frames 14:30 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 10:45 10:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10:15 10:00 09:45 09:30 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 06:30 06:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 06:00 05:45 05:30 05:15 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 02:15 02:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01:45 01:30 01:15 01:00 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 22:00 21:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21:30 21:15 21:00 20:45 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 17:45 17:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17:15 17:00 16:45 16:30 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 14:45 14:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n/a n/a n/a

Thresholds Menu The Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-139) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-139 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Daily Thresholds menu and the Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Thrs Threshold 268435455 268435455 500 268435455 268435455 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4 5
Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx
Frames Bytes Error Events Frames Bytes
: : : : :
6 - Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 7 - Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds 8 - Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-139. Thresholds Menu The Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-99. Table 6-99. Thresholds Menu Options
Option 1-5 Description Bonding Group Parameters (refer to Table 6-98 on page 188 for definitions) Reset ALL Bonding Group Thresholds to Defaults Enable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds Disable ALL Bonding Group Thresholds Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-191. This option is used to reset all bonding group thresholds to the factory defaults. This option is used to enable all bonding group thresholds. This option is used to disable all bonding group thresholds.
6 7 8
6-190
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-140) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6140 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the bonding group parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Bonding Group Stats->Group #1->Daily Thrs->Rx Frames
1 - Rx Frames Threshold : 268435455 2 - Rx Frames Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-191
Ethernet Stats Menu The Ethernet Stats menu (see Figure 6-134) is used to view access the performance monitoring statistics for each Ethernet client port.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats 1 2 3 4 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Port Port Port Port 1 2 3 4
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
5 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data 6 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data 7 - Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds 8 - Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds 9 - Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds
Selection :
Figure 6-141. Ethernet Stats Menu The Ethernet Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-96. Table 6-101. Ethernet Stats Menu Options
Option 1-4 5 Description Ethernet Port 1 - 4 Reset ALL Ethernet Client Current Interval PM Data Reset ALL Ethernet Client PM Data Reset ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds Enable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds Disable ALL Ethernet Client Thresholds Field This option displays the Ethernet Port # Stats Menu on page 6-193. This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for all Ethernet client ports. This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for all Ethernet client ports. This option is used to reset thresholds for all Ethernet client ports. This option is used to enable thresholds for all Ethernet client ports. This option is used to disable thresholds for all Ethernet client ports.
6 7 8 9
6-192
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Ethernet Port # Stats Menu The Ethernet Port # Stats menu (see Figure 6-142) is used to view the performance monitoring statistics and set thresholds for each Ethernet client port.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1 1 - Daily Performance 2 - Quarter Hourly Performance 3 - Daily Thresholds 4 - Quarter Hourly Thresholds 5 - Reset Ethernet Port #1 Current Interval PM Data 6 - Reset Ethernet Port #1 PM Data
Selection :
Figure 6-142. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu The Ethernet Port # Stats menu options are shown in Table 6-102. Table 6-102. Ethernet Port # Stats Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 4 5 Description Daily Performance Quarter Hourly Performance Daily Thresholds Quarter Hourly Thresholds Reset Ethernet Port # Current Interval PM Data Reset Ethernet Port # PM Data Field This option displays the Daily Performance Menu on page 6-195. This option displays the Quarter Hourly Performance Menu on page 6-196. This option displays the Thresholds Menu on page 6-197. This option displays the Thresholds Menu on page 6-197. This option is used to reset current interval performance monitoring data for the selected Ethernet client port. This option is used to reset performance monitoring data for the selected Ethernet client port.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-193
Table 6-103 provides descriptions for the Ethernet parameters used in the sub-level menus and screens. Table 6-103. Ethernet Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx CRC & Align Errors Description Indicates the total number of packets (including bad packets) received. Indicates the total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Indicates the total number of packets received that have a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1664 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Indicates the total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. Indicates the total number of packets received that were longer than 1664 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. Indicates the total number of collisions detected on this interface. Indicates the total number of packets transmitted. Indicates the total number of octets transmitted.
Rx Undersize Packets
Rx Oversize Packets
Rx Collisions Tx Packets Tx Octets
6-194
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Daily Performance Menu The Daily Performance menu (see Figure 6-143) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 24-hour period and the seven previous days. Each option on the Daily Performance menu displays a detailed view of the daily statistics for the selected parameter as shown in Figure 6-144.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Current 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Packets Octets CRC & Align Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Collisions Packets Octets : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12/31 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 12/30 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 12/29 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 12/28 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 12/27 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 12/26 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Selection :
Figure 6-143. Daily Performance Menu Table 6-103 on page 194 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Daily Performance menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily->Detailed
Rx Packets Current 12/31 12/30 12/29 12/28 12/27 12/26 12/25 : : : : : : : : 0 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Figure 6-144. Detailed Daily Performance Screen

Quarter Hourly Performance Menu The Quarter Hourly Performance menu (see Figure 6-145) provides statistics that are maintained for the current 15-minute interval and the completed 96 previous 15-minute intervals. Each option on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu displays a 24-hour history in 15 minute intervals (see Figure 6-146).
ID:
01/01/05 16:15 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Quarter Hourly Current 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Packets Octets CRC & Align Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Collisions Packets Octets : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Selection :
Figure 6-145. Quarter Hourly Performance Menu Table 6-103 on page 194 provides definitions for the parameters used on the Quarter Hourly Performance menu.
ID:
01/01/05 15:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Quarter Hourly->Rx Octets 15:00 14:45 14:30 14:15 14:00 13:45 13:30 13:15 13:00 12:45 12:30 12:15 12:00 11:45 11:30 11:15 11:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10:45 10:30 10:15 10:00 09:45 09:30 09:15 09:00 08:45 08:30 08:15 08:00 07:45 07:30 07:15 07:00 06:45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 06:30 06:15 06:00 05:45 05:30 05:15 05:00 04:45 04:30 04:15 04:00 03:45 03:30 03:15 03:00 02:45 02:30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02:15 02:00 01:45 01:30 01:15 01:00 00:45 00:30 00:15 00:00 23:45 23:30 23:15 23:00 22:45 22:30 22:15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22:00 21:45 21:30 21:15 21:00 20:45 20:30 20:15 20:00 19:45 19:30 19:15 19:00 18:45 18:30 18:15 18:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17:45 17:30 17:15 17:00 16:45 16:30 16:15 16:00 15:45 15:30 15:15 15:00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n/a

Thresholds Menu The Thresholds menu (see Figure 6-147) is used to select the parameter then set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6-147 is an example of the menu that is displayed for the Daily Thresholds menu and the Quarter Hourly Thresholds menu.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Thrs Threshold 268435455 268435455 500 268435455 268435455 268435455 268435455 268435455 Alarm Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Rx Packets Rx Octets CRC & Align Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Collisions Tx Packets Tx Octets
: : : : : : : :
9 - Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port 10 - Enable Thresholds for selected Port 11 - Disable Thresholds for selected Port
Selection :
Figure 6-147. Thresholds Menu The Thresholds menu options are shown in Table 6-104. Table 6-104. Thresholds Menu Options
Option 1-7 Description Ethernet Parameters (refer to Table 6-103 on page 194 for definitions) Reset Thresholds to Defaults for selected Port Enable Thresholds for selected Port Disable Thresholds for selected Port Function These options display the Threshold and Alarm Menu on page 6-198. This option is used to reset thresholds to the factory defaults for the selected port. This option is used to enable thresholds for the selected port. This option is used to disable thresholds for the selected port.
6 7 8
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-197
Threshold and Alarm Menu The Threshold and Alarm menu (see Figure 6-148) is used to set the threshold to the desired level and enable or disable the alarm to be issued once the threshold is exceeded. Figure 6148 is an example of the menu that is displayed for all of the Ethernet parameters.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->PM->Ethernet Stats->Port #1->Daily Thrs->Rx Octets
1 - Rx Octets Threshold : 10 2 - Rx Octets Alarm : Disabled
Selection :
6-198
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
System Alarms Menu The System Alarms menu (see Figure 6-149) provides options for viewing all alarms affecting MX3112 system operations. Alarms may be viewed within the Master Log screen. The Environmental Alarms menu contains user-provisionable options. The Alarm Chronology menu offers the viewing of alarms in either ascending or descending order.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->System Alarms 1 - Master Log 2 - Controller A Controller B 4 - User-Definable Alarms 5 - Alarm Chronology : Ascending
Selection :
Figure 6-149. System Alarms Menu The System Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-106. Table 6-106. System Alarms Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description Master Log Controller A Controller B Field This option displays the Master Alarms Log Screen on page 6-200. This option displays the Controller Alarms Log Screen on page 6-202. This option displays the Controller Alarms Log Screen on page 6-202 when Controller B is installed. This option displays the User-Definable Alarms Menu on page 6-204. This option is used to select the alarm chronology. Options are as follows: Ascending Descending
4 5
User-Definable Alarms Alarm Chronology : Ascending
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-199
Master Alarms Log Screen The Master Alarms Log screen (see Figure 6-150) is used to review and acknowledge all system alarms.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE Alarm Log - Master Alarms Alarms 1 to
ID: 13 of
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112 13 Page 1 of 1
Date Time Pos Type Port Level Description Status 07/08/05 16:46:58 CA Controller ENV Major PWR B FAIL *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #1 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #2 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #3 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #4 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #5 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #6 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #7 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #8 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #9 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #10 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #11 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #12 Major DS1 LOS *Active ---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------
Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Ascending (N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowledge (S)elect Log
Figure 6-150. Master Alarms Log Screen The Master Alarms Log screen fields are shown in Table 6-107. Table 6-107. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields
Field Date Time Pos Description This field displays the date that the alarm was initiated. This field displays the time that the alarm was initiated. This field displays the position (source) of the alarm. Possible sources are as follows: CA = Controller A CB = Controller B MA = Module A MB = Module B Type This field displays the type of the card that originates the alarm. Possible types are as follows: Controller Module Port This field displays the port/interface associated with the alarm.
6-200
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-107. Master Alarms Log Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Level Description This field displays the severity level of the alarm. Possible states are as follows: Info Alert Minor Major Critical Description Status This field displays a brief description of the alarm. This field displays the status of the alarm. Possible states are as follows: Active Clear Event An asterik (*) is displayed beside the status if the alarm is unacknowledged.
The Master Alarms Log screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-108. Table 6-108. Master Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys
Hot Keys
N P F L C A S
Description Next Previous First Last Clear Acknowledge Select Log
Function This hot key is used to display the next page of alarms. This hot key is used to display the previous page of alarms. This hot key is used to display the first page of alarms. This hot key is used to display the last page of alarms. This hot key is used to clear all acknowledged alarms. This hot key is used to acknowledge all alarms. This hot key is used to access a specific alarm log. Options are as follows: M = Master C = Controller
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-201
Controller Alarms Log Screen The Controller Alarms Log screen (see Figure 6-151) is used to review and acknowledge controller card alarms.
Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE Alarm Log - Controller Alarms Alarms 1 to
ID: 14 of
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112 21 Page 1 of
Date Time Pos Type Port Level Description Status 07/08/05 16:46:58 CA Controller ENV Major PWR B FAIL *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #1 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #2 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #3 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #4 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #5 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #6 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #7 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #8 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #9 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #10 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #11 Major DS1 LOS *Active 07/08/05 16:47:03 CA Controller DS1 PORT #12 Major DS1 LOS *Active ---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------
Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Ascending (N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowledge (S)elect Log
Figure 6-151. Controller Alarms Log Screen The Controller Alarms Log screen fields are shown in Table 6-109. Table 6-109. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields
Field Date Time Pos Description This field displays the date that the alarm was initiated. This field displays the time that the alarm was initiated. This field displays the position (source) of the alarm. Possible sources are as follows: CA = Controller A CB = Controller B MA = Module A MB = Module B Type This field displays the type of the card that originates the alarm. Possible types are as follows: Controller Module Port This field displays the port/interface associated with the alarm.
6-202
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-109. Controller Alarms Log Screen Fields (Continued)

Field Level Description This field displays the severity level of the alarm. Possible states are as follows: Info Alert Minor Major Critical Description Status This field displays a brief description of the alarm. This field displays the status of the alarm. Possible states are as follows: Active Clear Event An asterik (*) is displayed beside the status if the alarm is unacknowledged.
The Controller Alarms Log screen hot keys are shown in Table 6-110. Table 6-110. Controller Alarms Log Screen Hot Keys
Hot Keys
N P F L C A S
Description Next Previous First Last Clear Acknowledge Select Log
Function This hot key is used to display the next page of alarms. This hot key is used to display the previous page of alarms. This hot key is used to display the first page of alarms. This hot key is used to display the last page of alarms. This hot key is used to clear all acknowledged alarms. This hot key is used to acknowledge all alarms. This hot key is used to access a specific alarm log. Options are as follows: M = Master C = Controller
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-203
User-Definable Alarms Menu The User-Definable Alarms menu (see Figure 6-152) allows access to environmental and stand-by controller alarms.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms 1 - Environmental Alarms 2 - Stand-by Controller Removed Level
: Minor
Selection :
Figure 6-152. User-Definable Alarms Menu The User-Definable Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-111. Table 6-111. User-Definable Alarms Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description Environmental Alarms Stand-by Controller Removed Level Function This option displays the Environmental Alarms Menu on page 6-205. This option displays the severity of the alarm generated if the stand-by controller card is removed. Options are as follows: Disabled. Alarm is suppressed. Info Alert Minor Major Critical
6-204
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Environmental Alarms Menu The Environmental Alarms menu (see Figure 6-153) provides access to the auxiliary input and power feed alarms.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms Source Aux #1 Input Aux #2 Input Aux #3 Input Aux #4 Input PWR Bus A Input PWR Bus B Input Description AUX #1 INPUT AUX #2 INPUT AUX #3 INPUT AUX #4 INPUT PWR A FAIL PWR B FAIL Level Major Major Major Major Major Major
1 2 3 4 5 6
Selection :
Figure 6-153. Environmental Alarms Menu The Environmental Alarms menu options are shown in Table 6-112. Table 6-112. Environmental Alarms Menu Options
Option 1-4 5-6 Description Aux #1 - #4 Input PWR Bus A - B Input Function This option displays the Auxiliary Input Menu on page 6-206. This option displays the Power Menu on page 6207.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-205
Auxiliary Input Menu The Auxiliary Input menu (see Figure 6-154) is used to input the description of the selected auxiliary input and set the alarm severity level.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms->Aux 1 - AUX #1 Input Description : AUX #1 INPUT 2 - AUX #1 Input Level : Major
Selection :
Figure 6-154. Auxiliary Input Menu The Auxiliary Input menu options are shown in Table 6-113. Table 6-113. Auxiliary Input Menu Options
Option 1 2 Description AUX Input Description AUX Input Level Function This option is used to enter a 16-character, auxiliary input description. This option is used to set the alarm severity level of the selected auxiliary input. Options are as follows: Disabled. Alarm is suppressed. Info Alert Minor Major Critical ACO. The input serves as an ACO input.
6-206
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Power Menu The Power menu (see Figure 6-155) is used to set the alarm severity level for the selected power bus input.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->System Alarms->User-Definable Alarms->Environmental Alarms->Power 1 - PWR A FAIL Level : Major
Selection :
Figure 6-155. Power Menu The Power menu options are shown in Table 6-114. Table 6-114. Power Menu Options
Option 1 Description PWR FAIL Level Function This option is used to set the alarm severity level of the selected power bus input. Options are as follows: Disabled. Alarm is suppressed. Info Alert Minor Major Critical
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-207
Remote Management Menu The Remote Management menu (Figure 6-156) provides menu access to a remote (RT) MX3112 from a local system. The Remote Management menu is available on an MX3112 that is operating in COT mode. If connected to one or more remote MX3112 systems at the far end of one or more bonding groups, the Remote Management menu will list the remote systems by their system ID as shown in Figure 6-156. The Remote Management menu traffic between the COT and the RT systems is carried by one of the bonding groups as in-band traffic. The COT and RT systems communicate with each other to designate one of the bonding groups to carry this management traffic. This communication is performed via a proprietary messaging system over DS1 FDL channels. The bonding group used for carrying this menu traffic is automatically selected according to its available bandwidth compared with other bonding groups. The menu traffic can automatically shift to another bonding group in the event of bandwidth impairments.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Remote Menu Access 1 - MX3112 REMOTE [Critical]
Selection :
Figure 6-156. Remote Management Menu The Remote Management menu options are shown in Table 6-115. Table 6-115. Remote Management Menu Options
Option 1 Description MX3112 REMOTE Function This option gives access to the log-on screen for the remote MX3112 system. All screens are the same as the screens for the local MX3112 system.
6-208
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Firmware Upgrade Menu The Firmware Upgrade menu (Figure 6-157) provides access to upgrade the firmware for both controllers and both expansion modules. For additional information on firmware upgrades, refer to Firmware Upgrade Procedures on page 7-2.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade C MX3112........ - A [A00.20] .............. - B []
Selection :
Figure 6-157. Firmware Upgrade Menu The Firmware Upgrade menu options are shown in Table 6-116. Table 6-116. Firmware Upgrade Menu Options
Option C Description MX3112 Function This option displays the Method Menu on page 6210.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-209
Method Menu The Method menu (Figure 6-158) provides options for upgrading the MX3112 firmware. CAUTION Resetting this card will disrupt traffic and cause a switch to the standby card if it is installed.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method 1 - Y-Modem 2 - TFTP 3 - Reset Active Controller (A)
Controller A status: Ready for transfer Controller B status: Not available
Selection :
Figure 6-158. Method Menu The Method menu options are shown in Table 6-117. Table 6-117. Method Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 Description Y-Modem TFTP Reset Active Controller Function This option is used to transfer the new application software to the unit via YModem. This option displays the TFTP Update Menu on page 6-211. This option resets the active controller card. Resetting the active controller card switches operation to the standby card. In a redundant system, the standby card will update and automatically reset.
The Method menu fields are shown in Table 6-118.
6-210
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-118. Method Menu Fields

Field Controller A - B status Description This field displays the progress of the TFTP download for the controller. Progress messages are as follows: Ready for transfer Not available Transfer in progress
TFTP Update Menu The TFTP Update menu (Figure 6-159) is used to download code stored from a computer to the MX3112 through a TFTP server.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method->TFTP Update 1 - TFTP Server : 172.22.146.57 2 - Remote Filename : mx3112/ao1.bin 3 - Initiate Transfer
Selection :
Figure 6-159. TFTP Update Menu The TFTP Update menu options are shown in Table 6-119. Table 6-119. TFTP Update Menu Options
Option 1 2 3 Description TFTP Server Remote Filename Initiate Transfer Function This option is used to enter the IP address of the TFTP server hosting the application software file. This option is used to enter the path and filename of the application software file on the TFTP server. This option displays the TFTP Update Status Screen on page 6-212.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-211
TFTP Update Status Screen The TFTP Update Status screen (Figure 6-160) displays the status of the TFTP connection.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method->TFTP Update->Status TFTP Server Remote Filename TFTP Status : 172.22.146.57 : mx3112/ao1.bin : Contacting Server -
Controller A status: Transfer in progress Controller B status: Not available
Figure 6-160. TFTP Update Status Screen The TFTP Update Status screen options are shown in Table 6-120. Table 6-120. TFTP Update Status Screen Options
Field TFTP Server Remote Filename TFTP Status Controller A - B status Description This field displays the IP address of the TFTP server. The TFTP IP address must be configured prior to attempting a TFTP download. This field displays the TFTP filename that will be used to upgrade the controller. This field displays the progress of the TFTP download. Table 6-121 describes the TFTP download progress messages. This field displays the progress of the TFTP download for the Controller A. Progress messages are as follows: Ready for transfer Not available Transfer in progress
6-212
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Table 6-121. TFTP Download Progress Messages

Progress Message Contacting Server Description This message indicates that an attempt to establish communication with the TFTP network server specified by the server address in the TFTP Server IP Address field is in progress. This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server has been lost. This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server has been established and the update file is being transferred between the TFTP network server and the MX3112. This message indicates that the MX3112 successfully received the update file. This message indicates that the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file name or path in the Remote Filename field. This status indicates that the TFTP network server denied the MX3112 access to the given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are selected for the specified path.
Timed Out Beginning TFTP Transfer
Completed File Not Found Access Violation
The TFTP Update Status screen hot key is shown in Table 6-122. Table 6-122. TFTP Update Status Screen Hot Key
Hot Key
C
Description Cancel TFTP Transfer
Function This option is used to cancel the TFTP transfer.
Logout Selection of the Logout menu item results in an immediate exit from the program, no further menus, screens, or confirmation dialog boxes are presented.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
6-213
6-214
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 7 Maintenance
INTRODUCTION
The MX3 chassis and MX3112 controller card do not require routine maintenance for normal operation. However, the MX3 fan module does require routine maintenance as described in the MX3 Fan Module Maintenance section. Firmware upgrade procedures are also provided. ADTRAN does not recommend that repairs be attempted in the field. Repair services can be obtained by returning the defective unit to ADTRAN. For warranty information, refer to Appendix A, Warranty.
MX3 FAN MODULE MAINTENANCE

Replacement filters (P/N 1189009L1) are available and can be ordered separately. This is a plug-in assembly and can be replaced without powering down the chassis. Minimal routine maintenance of the MX3 fan module is required. The filter should be inspected for excessive dust at least every 90 days and replaced as needed. To replace the filter, perform the following steps: 1. Using a flat or phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the screw on the left side of the front panel of the MX3 fan module. 2. Remove the MX3 fan module, taking care not to disturb the filter. 3. Remove the old filter, taking care not to allow dust from the filter to enter the system. 4. Install a new filter (P/N 1189009L1). 5. Install the MX3 fan module back into the MX3 chassis. 6. Tighten the screw to secure the MX3 fan module to the MX3 chassis.
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
7-1
FIRMWARE UPGRADE PROCEDURES

The MX3112 supports firmware transfers via Y-modem (craft or Telnet menu sessions), TFTP transfer, and controller-to-controller transfer.
Upgrading a Redundant System

When upgrading a redundant system via Y-modem or TFTP transfer (see Figure 7-1), the procedure is as follows: 1. The user initiates the transfer from the active controller. 2. The transfer begins to both the active and stand-by controllers simultaneously. 3. When the file is received, it is verified for integrity and compatibility with the hardware. 4. The stand-by controller proceeds to program the new firmware, and then reboots automatically. 5. When the active controller detects a successful reboot of the stand-by controller, the active controller proceeds to program the new firmware. 6. The user is then requested to manually reboot the active controller. 7. When the user initiates the reboot of the active controller, a protection switch will take place to the stand-by controller and the active controller will reboot.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method 1 - Y-Modem 2 - TFTP 3 - Reset Active Controller (A)
Controller A status: Successful. Manually reset active controller. Controller B status: Not available
Selection :
Figure 7-1. Firmware Upgrade Method Menu During critical phases of the upgrade procedure, the ACT LED on the front panel will become solid amber. It is very important for the system to remain undisturbed during this process. Removing a controller during a critical phase of this process could corrupt the firmware that resides on the controller.
7-2
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Section 7, Maintenance - Firmware Upgrade Procedures
Controller-to-Controller Transfer
If two controllers are operating redundantly, and one controller has a newer version than the other, the user may initiate a direct firmware transfer of the newer firmware from one controller to the other, regardless of which is active. Options will become available on the menu as shown below in Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3.
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade C MX3112........ - A [A03] MX3112........ - B [A02]
Selection :
Figure 7-2. Firmware Upgrade Menu
ID:
01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112
MX3112->Firmware Upgrade->Method 1 - Y-Modem 2 - TFTP 3 - Reset Active Controller (A) 4 - Upgrade controller B to version A03
Controller A status: Ready for transfer Controller B status: Ready for transfer Note: When transferring via Y-modem or TFTP, the standby controller will update before the active controller.
Selection :
Figure 7-3. Method Menu
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
7-3
7-4
PRELIMINARY
61189901L1-1A
Appendix A Warranty
WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICE
ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty. Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, Customer and Product Service (CAPS) requests, or further information.
ADTRAN Sales
Pricing/Availability: 800-827-0807
ADTRAN Technical Support

Pre-Sales Applications/Post-Sales Technical Assistance: 800-726-8663 Standard hours: Monday - Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day
ADTRAN Repair/CAPS
Return for Repair/Upgrade: (256) 963-8722
Repair and Return Address

Contact CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN. ADTRAN, Inc. CAPS Department 901 Explorer Boulevard Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807
61189901L1-1A
PRELIMINARY
A-1
Carrier Networks Division 901 Explorer Blvd. Huntsville, AL 35806

Adtran MX3112 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adtran MX3112 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MX 3RM

MX3112 System Manual

MX3112 System Manual

To the Holder of the Manual

MX3112 System Manual

Section 2 Engineering Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Section 3 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

MX3112 System Manual

Section 4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Section 5 Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Section 6 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

MX3112 System Manual

Section 7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Appendix A Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

MX3112 System Manual

MX3112 System Manual

MX3112 System Manual

MX3112 System Manual

MX3 Fan Module

MX3112 Controller Card

MX3 4-Port Ethernet Module

MX3112 System Manual

Table 1-1. Tributaries for Channelized DS3

Section 1, Introduction - Features

MX3112 System Manual

DATA PATH DESCRIPTION

Copper Mode Block Diagram

MX3ETH4 4-Port 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Module

M13 mux and DS3 interface are not used

PHY PHY PHY PHY

Figure 1-2. Copper Mode Block Diagram

Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description

Port 1 Port 2 MX3ETH4 4-Port 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Module

Bonding Groups Ethernet Ports

PHY PHY PHY PHY

DS1 DS1 LIUs LIU LIUs

DS1 DS1 Framers F Framers

Bonding Bonding Engine Engine

Figure 1-3. Copper Mode Block Diagram

MX3112 System Manual

DS3 Mode Block Diagram

MX3ETH4 4-Port 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Module

PHY PHY PHY PHY

Figure 1-4. DS3 Mode Block Diagram using P/N 1189901L1

Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description

MX3ETH4 4-Port 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Module

PHY PHY PHY PHY

MX3112 System Manual

Data Path Provisioning

Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description

MX3112 System Manual

01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112

Local 10.100.51.94 255.255.255.0 10.100.51.254 04/18/2006 14:03:15 MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM

'?' - System Help Screen

01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112

Local 10.100.51.94 255.255.255.0 10.100.51.254 04/18/2006 14:15:42 MX3112 LOCAL SYSTEM

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 1-7. Bonding Group Assignment Example (DS3 Mode)

Section 1, Introduction - Data Path Description

Card: Controller A ADTRAN MX3112 System Unacknowledged Alarms: NONE

01/01/05 12:00 Site 1 MX3112

'?' - System Help Screen

MX3112 System Manual